WO2022110957A1 - 一种可穿戴设备 - Google Patents

一种可穿戴设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022110957A1
WO2022110957A1 PCT/CN2021/116273 CN2021116273W WO2022110957A1 WO 2022110957 A1 WO2022110957 A1 WO 2022110957A1 CN 2021116273 W CN2021116273 W CN 2021116273W WO 2022110957 A1 WO2022110957 A1 WO 2022110957A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
wearing
wearable device
locking
user
section
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/116273
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
傅鑫
王跃强
王冲
黄孙杰
王力维
张浩锋
Original Assignee
深圳市韶音科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202120288727.XU external-priority patent/CN214704204U/zh
Priority claimed from CN202120623637.1U external-priority patent/CN215932289U/zh
Priority claimed from CN202110545559.2A external-priority patent/CN115373153A/zh
Priority claimed from CN202121079519.5U external-priority patent/CN215642098U/zh
Application filed by 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 filed Critical 深圳市韶音科技有限公司
Priority to EP21896461.7A priority Critical patent/EP4177668A4/en
Priority to JP2023517366A priority patent/JP2023542151A/ja
Priority to KR1020237008183A priority patent/KR20230048398A/ko
Publication of WO2022110957A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022110957A1/zh
Priority to US18/155,778 priority patent/US20230188880A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1008—Earpieces of the supra-aural or circum-aural type
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G02C5/143—Side-members having special ear pieces
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C11/00—Non-optical adjuncts; Attachment thereof
    • G02C11/06—Hearing aids
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C11/00—Non-optical adjuncts; Attachment thereof
    • G02C11/10—Electronic devices other than hearing aids
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G02C5/16—Side-members resilient or with resilient parts
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2209—Pivot bearings and hinge bolts other than screws
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2281—Special hinge screws
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/105—Earpiece supports, e.g. ear hooks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1058—Manufacture or assembly
    • H04R1/1066—Constructional aspects of the interconnection between earpiece and earpiece support
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R5/00—Stereophonic arrangements
    • H04R5/033—Headphones for stereophonic communication
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C2200/00—Generic mechanical aspects applicable to one or more of the groups G02C1/00 - G02C5/00 and G02C9/00 - G02C13/00 and their subgroups
    • G02C2200/26—Coil spring pushed upon actuation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2460/00—Details of hearing devices, i.e. of ear- or headphones covered by H04R1/10 or H04R5/033 but not provided for in any of their subgroups, or of hearing aids covered by H04R25/00 but not provided for in any of its subgroups
    • H04R2460/13—Hearing devices using bone conduction transducers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R5/00—Stereophonic arrangements
    • H04R5/033—Headphones for stereophonic communication
    • H04R5/0335—Earpiece support, e.g. headbands or neckrests

Definitions

  • This specification relates to the field of acoustics, in particular to a wearable device.
  • the wearable device may have an audio function, and the audio output can be realized through the speaker assembly disposed on the wearable device, and the user experience can be effectively improved by improving the quality of the output sound signal.
  • This specification provides a wearable device that can more conveniently transmit sound signals to users.
  • An embodiment of the present specification provides a wearable device, including: a wearing part, the wearing part includes: a connecting segment and a concave segment, the concave segment is connected with the connecting segment; wherein, the concave segment makes all the The upper edge of the wearing piece has a downward depression on the wearing piece; the lower concave section has an acoustic output end.
  • the recessed segment is configured to bring the recessed segment closer to the user's ear when the wearer is worn by the user, the recessed segment having the acoustic output at the user's ear in front of or near the department.
  • the concave section includes an angularly connected mounting portion and a transition portion, the acoustic output end is disposed at the mounting portion or the transition portion, the transition portion and the transition portion in the mounting portion At least one of the connecting segments is bent and connected and extends downward.
  • the angle of the included angle formed between the transition portion and the mounting portion is in the range of 30 degrees to 90 degrees.
  • the connecting section includes a first connecting section
  • the transition section is connected between the mounting section and the first connecting section, and the transition section and the first connecting section are bent Connect and extend down.
  • the wearable device further includes a visual element
  • the connecting section further includes a second connecting section, the second connecting section is connected to one end of the mounting portion, and the second connecting section is away from One end of the mounting portion is connected to the visual element.
  • the second connecting section includes a first leg, a second leg and an adjustment part, the first leg and the second leg are connected by the adjustment part, and the first leg is connected with the adjustment part.
  • a leg and the second leg can perform operations including relative stretching and/or rotation through the adjusting part, and the second leg is connected to the mounting part.
  • the wearable device further includes a functional element, and the functional element is disposed on the first connecting section, the concave section and/or the second connecting section.
  • the functional element includes an acoustic element that emits sound through the acoustic output.
  • the acoustic output end includes a sound outlet hole, and the sound outlet hole is disposed in at least one of the following places: the concave section faces the inner side of the user's head, the concave section faces the user's ear The edge of the screen or the concave section faces the side of the user's tragus.
  • the acoustic output end includes a vibrating surface
  • the concave section is provided with the vibrating surface on the inner side of the user's head.
  • the wearing member includes a left ear wearing part and a right ear wearing part, the left ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part are respectively in stable contact with the left and right ears of the user; the left ear wearing part Both the ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part are provided with a communication component, and the communication component is used for transmitting the signal between the left ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part.
  • the communication component is a wireless communication component.
  • the communication mode of the wireless communication component includes at least one of Bluetooth, infrared, ultra-wideband, or near-field magnetic induction.
  • the wearable device further includes a visual member that is physically connected to the wearable member, and the wearable member is capable of being opposite along a point of connection with the visual member. Describe the rotation of the visual element.
  • the wearable device further includes a relative position detection device, the relative position detection device is used to detect the position of the wearing member relative to the visible member; wherein, when the wearing member is relatively When the visible part is in a first position, the wearable device is in a folded state; when the wearing part is in a second position relative to the visible part, the wearable device is in an open state; when the wearing part is in a second position The wearable device is in a transition state when the piece is in a transition position relative to the visible piece.
  • a relative position detection device is used to detect the position of the wearing member relative to the visible member; wherein, when the wearing member is relatively When the visible part is in a first position, the wearable device is in a folded state; when the wearing part is in a second position relative to the visible part, the wearable device is in an open state; when the wearing part is in a second position The wearable device is in a transition state when the piece is in a transition position relative to the visible piece.
  • the relative position detection device includes a spring-type probe and a conductive metal part disposed at the connection between the wearing part and the visible part; when the spring-type probe and the conductive metal part are connected When disconnected, the wearing part is in the first position or the transition position relative to the visible part; when the spring-type probe is electrically connected with the conductive metal part, the wearing part is relative to the The viewable member is in the second position.
  • the relative position detection device includes a switch structure; when the switch structure is in an open state, the wearing part is in the first position or the transition position relative to the visible part; When the switch structure is in an on state, the wearing member is in the second position relative to the visible member.
  • the relative position detection device includes a magnet, a magnetic conductor, and a magnetic field detector
  • the magnet can be coupled with the magnetic conductor
  • the magnetic field detector is used to detect the gap between the magnet and the magnetic conductor when the magnetic field strength between the magnet and the magnet conducting body exceeds the set magnetic field strength threshold, the wearing part is in the second position relative to the visible part; when the magnet and the When the magnetic field strength between the magnetic conductors does not exceed a preset magnetic field strength threshold, the wearing piece is in the first position or the transition position relative to the visible piece.
  • the relative position detection device further includes a time detection component for detecting the duration of time that the wearing member is in the second position relative to the visual member.
  • the wearable device further includes a visible part and a quick release assembly
  • the quick release assembly includes a mounting seat and a first locking part, one end of the mounting seat is provided with an insertion cavity, and the mounting seat Connected with one of the wearing piece or the visible piece, the first locking piece is arranged on the mounting seat and passes through the insertion cavity, and the first locking piece comprises a coaxially arranged first locking piece A locking part and a first unlocking part, the projection of the first unlocking part in the axial direction is within the projection range of the first locking part in the axial direction; the other one of the wearing part or the visible part A locking hole is provided and inserted into the insertion cavity; when the first locking portion is located in the locking hole, the other of the wearing piece or the visible piece is relatively fixed to the insertion cavity ; When the first unlocking portion replaces the position of the first locking portion and is located in the locking hole, the first unlocking portion can be disengaged from the locking hole.
  • the quick release assembly further includes a first elastic member, the first elastic member is disposed on the mounting seat and elastically abuts against the first locking portion, the first elastic member It is used for providing elastic force to make the first locking part move into the insertion cavity.
  • the first elastic member is disposed in the mounting seat and elastically abuts against an end of the first locking portion away from the first unlocking portion; when the first locking member is pressed , the first locking member compresses the first elastic member, so that the first unlocking portion replaces the first locking portion and is located in the insertion cavity; when the first locking member is released, the The first elastic member pushes the first locking member to reset so that the first locking portion moves into the insertion cavity.
  • the quick release assembly further includes a first positioning cover, the first positioning cover is disposed on the mounting seat, and the first elastic member is elastically compressed and disposed on the first positioning cover and the between the first locking parts.
  • the first positioning cover includes a cylindrical body, a bottom wall disposed at one end of the cylindrical body, and a retaining ring disposed at the other end of the cylindrical body, and the first locking portion faces away from the first locking portion.
  • One end of an unlocking part is provided with an inverted buckle
  • the first elastic member is arranged between the bottom wall of one end of the cylinder and the first locking part, and the first locking part slides with the cylinder It is provided that the undercut is matched with the blocking ring to restrict the first locking piece from disengaging from the first positioning cover.
  • the other end of the mounting seat is provided with an insertion slot
  • one end of one of the wearing part or the visible part is provided with an insertion part
  • the insertion part is detachably connected to the insertion slot .
  • the quick release assembly further includes a second locking member, a second elastic member and a second positioning cover
  • the second locking member includes a second locking portion and a second unlocking portion that are coaxially arranged
  • the second positioning cover is arranged on the mounting seat, the second locking piece is slidably arranged with the second positioning cover, and the second locking piece passes through the insertion slot, and the second elastic piece
  • the elastic compression is arranged between the second positioning cover and the second locking member;
  • the insertion part is provided with a rotation hole and a channel communicating with the rotation hole, the insertion part is inserted into the insertion slot, and the insertion part is inserted into the insertion slot;
  • the second locking part is located in the rotation hole, and the second locking part is rotated and matched with the rotation hole; press one end of the second locking member, so that the second unlocking part replaces the second locking part
  • the position of the locking portion is located in the rotating hole, and the second locking portion and the rotating hole are separated through the passage.
  • the wearable device further comprises a spacer, the spacer is connected with the concave section and/or the connection section, when the user wears the wearable device, the spacer at least Part of the ear that wraps around the user.
  • the wearable device further includes a connecting member disposed on the concave section and/or the connecting section, and the isolation member is connected to the concave section and/or the connecting section through the connecting member.
  • the connecting segments are connected.
  • the connecting member is detachably connected to the wearing member.
  • the wearable device further includes a visible part, the visible part is physically connected to the wearing part, the wearing part includes a left ear wearing part and a right ear wearing part, the left ear wearing part is The ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part are respectively in stable contact with the left and right ears of the user; the ends of the left ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part away from the visible part are connected by the spacer.
  • the wearable device further includes an adjusting member; the wearing member includes a connecting end and a erecting end that are oppositely arranged, the erecting end is in stable contact with the user's ear, and the adjusting member is replaceably connected At the connecting end, the length of the wearing piece can be adjusted by replacing the adjusting pieces with different lengths.
  • the connecting end of the wearing piece is provided with a first buckle
  • the end of the adjusting member connected to the wearing piece is provided with a second buckle adapted to the first buckle , the adjusting piece and the wearing piece are connected by the first buckle and the second buckle.
  • the wearable device further includes a visible part, the visible part includes a positioning end, one end of the adjustment part is detachably connected to the connecting end of the wearing part, and the other end is connected to the connecting end of the wearing part. on the positioning end of the visual element.
  • the positioning end of the visual element is provided with a snap portion, and the end portion of the adjustment element connected to the visual element is provided with a snap portion adapted to the snap portion;
  • the adjusting member and the visual member are connected through the mating of the engaging portion and the engaging portion.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wearable device provided according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a wearable device according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device according to other embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device according to further embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device according to further embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of the positions of the sound outlet hole, the vibration surface and the function hole in the wearing piece shown in Figure 13;
  • Fig. 15 is the position schematic diagram of the sound outlet hole in the wearing piece shown in Fig. 13;
  • Fig. 16 is the position schematic diagram of the sound outlet hole in the wearing piece shown in Fig. 13;
  • Fig. 17 is the position schematic diagram of the sound outlet hole in the wearing piece shown in Fig. 13;
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device provided with a spacer according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the isolation member and the wearing member according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the spacer and the wearing member according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • 21 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the spacer and the wearing member according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • 22 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the isolation connector and the wearing device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the isolation connector and the wearing device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Fig. 24 is a schematic diagram of transmitting signals between two wearing parts according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of the disassembly of the structure of the wearable device in the embodiment of Fig. 25;
  • Fig. 27 is the structural disassembly schematic diagram of the wearing piece in the embodiment of Fig. 25;
  • Fig. 28 is a schematic diagram of the connection structure of the U-shaped member and the connecting rod according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the setting position of the relative position detection device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device provided according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Figure 31 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the wearable device shown in Figure 30;
  • Figure 32 is a schematic diagram of the axial side structure of the mounting seat in the wearable device shown in Figure 31;
  • FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional structural schematic diagram of the first locking member, the first elastic member, the first positioning cover and the key plate in the quick release assembly shown in FIG. 31;
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of the first embodiment of the connection between the mounting base and the wearing piece in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31;
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic structural diagram of the second embodiment of the connection between the mounting base and the wearing part in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31;
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic structural diagram from another perspective of the connection structure of the mounting seat and the wearing piece shown in FIG. 35;
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic structural diagram of a third embodiment in which the mounting base is connected to the wearing piece in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31 .
  • system means for distinguishing different components, elements, parts, parts or assemblies at different levels.
  • device means for converting signals into signals.
  • unit means for converting signals into signals.
  • module means for converting signals into signals.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wearable device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the type of wearable device 1000 may include glasses, smart bracelets, headphones, hearing aids, smart helmets, smart watches, smart clothing, smart backpacks, smart accessories, etc., or any combination thereof.
  • the wearable device 1000 may be functional myopia glasses, reading glasses, cycling glasses or sunglasses, etc., or intelligent glasses, such as audio glasses with earphone function, the wearable device 1000 may also be a helmet, Head-mounted devices such as Augmented Reality (AR) devices or Virtual Reality (VR) devices.
  • the augmented reality device or virtual reality device may include a virtual reality headset, virtual reality glasses, augmented reality headset, augmented reality glasses, etc., or any combination thereof.
  • virtual reality devices and/or augmented reality devices may include Google Glass, Oculus Rift, Hololens, Gear VR, and the like.
  • wearable device 1000 may include wearable member 100 and viewable member 200 .
  • the visual element 200 is used to be mounted on a certain part of the user's body, for example, an eye, a hand and the like.
  • the wearing member 100 is connected with one or both ends of the visual member 200 for keeping the wearable device 1000 in stable contact with the user.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a wearable device according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device according to some other embodiments of the present specification
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the wearable device according to some embodiments of the present specification. 2 to 5 exemplarily show the structures of several common wearable devices, respectively.
  • the viewable element 200 may be a lens, a display screen, or a display screen with a lens effect.
  • the visual element 200 can also be a lens and its auxiliary parts or a display screen and its auxiliary parts, and the auxiliary parts can be parts such as a frame or a bracket.
  • the visual element 200 may also be an auxiliary component that does not contain a lens or display screen.
  • the wearing member 100 may be a component such as temples or a headband.
  • the wearing part 100 is a temple
  • the wearable device 1000 includes a visual part 200 and two wearing parts 100, and the two wearing parts 100 are respectively connected to the two ends of the visual part 200 and used to be erected on the corresponding Left ear and right ear;
  • the wearing part 100 is a headband-like component, and the headband-like component can be adjusted to suit the head shape of the user, and a variety of functional components can also be provided on it
  • the wearable device 1000 includes a The visual element 200 and a wearing element 100, two ends of the wearing element 100 are respectively connected to two ends of the visual element 200.
  • the visual element 200 is an auxiliary part, which includes a bracket part 202 and a nose frame part 203 .
  • the nose bridge part 203 is connected to the bracket part 202 , and the nose bridge part 203 is used to support the bridge of the user's nose.
  • the two wearing parts 100 are temples and are respectively connected to two ends of the bracket part 202 .
  • the support part 202 is not provided with a lens or a display screen, so as to constitute the wearable device 1000 without a lens or a display screen.
  • the bracket portion 202 may also be provided with lenses or a display screen.
  • the visual element 200 is a component having a display screen.
  • the wearing piece 100 is a headband-like component. Two ends of the wearing member 100 are respectively connected to two ends of the visual member 200 to form a head-mounted device that can be framed on the head of a human body.
  • head-mounted AR devices or head-mounted VR devices are examples of head-mounted VR devices.
  • the visual element 200 may be a lens
  • the two wearing elements 100 are temples and are connected to two ends of the visual element 200 respectively.
  • the wearable device 1000 further includes an optical module 205 .
  • the optical module 205 is disposed on the visible part 200 or the wearing part 100 , and the optical module 205 is used for displaying picture information, so as to realize the display of the wearable device 1000 . Function. As shown in FIG. 2 , the optical module 205 may be disposed on the visual element 200 . In some embodiments, the optical module 205 may be disposed on the bracket portion 202, and the optical module 205 is a screen component for displaying images. As shown in FIG. 3 , the optical module 205 may be disposed on the wearing member 100 . In some embodiments, the optical module 205 may include a holographic collimating lens for projecting a holographic image. The optical module 205 is disposed on the wearing member 100 (eg, on the mounting portion 21 of the concave section 20 ) to project a holographic image to the eyes of the user.
  • the wearing member 100 may be movably connected to the visual member 200 by a rotational connection or a telescopic connection, or a relatively fixed connection such as a snap connection, a screw connection, or an integrally formed connection.
  • the above description about the wearable device 1000 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the wearable device 1000 under the guidance of this specification.
  • these corrections and changes are still within the scope of this specification.
  • the optical module 205 and the bracket part 202 can be combined into one unit, so that the bracket part 202 has the function of displaying a picture.
  • the wearable device 1000 may be a device with an audio playback function.
  • the wearable device may include at least one set of speaker components, and the speaker components generate sound and then transmit the sound to the user through air conduction or bone conduction.
  • the speaker assembly can be used to convert a signal containing acoustic information into an acoustic signal.
  • a speaker assembly may generate mechanical vibrations to transmit sound waves (ie, sound signals) in response to receiving a signal containing sound information.
  • the speaker assembly may include a vibrating element and/or a vibrating element coupled to the vibrating element (eg, at least a portion of the housing of the wearable device 1000).
  • the loudspeaker assembly When the loudspeaker assembly generates mechanical vibration, it is accompanied by the conversion of energy, and the loudspeaker assembly can realize the conversion of the signal containing the sound information to the mechanical vibration.
  • the conversion process may involve the coexistence and conversion of many different types of energy.
  • an electrical signal (ie a signal containing sound information) can be directly converted into mechanical vibration by a transducer device (not shown in the figure) in the vibration element (not shown in the figure) of the speaker assembly, and the vibration transmission through the speaker assembly
  • the elements conduct mechanical vibrations to transmit sound waves.
  • sound information can be contained in the optical signal, and a specific transducer device can realize the process of converting the optical signal into a vibration signal.
  • Other types of energy that can coexist and transform during the operation of the transducer device include thermal energy, magnetic field energy, and the like.
  • the energy conversion method of the transducer device may include a moving coil type, an electrostatic type, a piezoelectric type, a moving iron type, a pneumatic type, an electromagnetic type, and the like.
  • a speaker assembly may include one or more bone conduction speakers. In some embodiments, a speaker assembly may include one or more air conduction speakers. In some embodiments, a speaker assembly may include a combination of one or more bone conduction speakers and one or more air conduction speakers at the same time.
  • a speaker assembly may be provided on the wearable member 100 and/or the viewable member 200 .
  • a speaker assembly may be provided at the wearer 100 to facilitate the transmission of emitted sounds to the user.
  • the speaker assembly may be positioned at the tail (the end away from the viewable element 200 ), the head (the end near the viewable element 200 ), or anywhere between the tail and the head of the wearable member 100 .
  • the speaker assembly may be disposed at the rear of the wearable member 100 while no speaker assembly is disposed elsewhere on the wearable member 100 .
  • multiple speaker assemblies may be provided at multiple locations on the wearer 100 .
  • at least one speaker assembly may be provided at the tail, the head, or any position between the tail and the head of the wearing member 100 .
  • the speaker assembly may be disposed on the outer surface of the wearable 100 or on the interior of the wearable 100 .
  • the speaker assembly may be positioned close to where the wearer 100 contacts the user (eg, near the temple to the ear on the wearer 100).
  • the wearable 100 may include a cavity for accommodating a speaker assembly, and at least a portion of the speaker assembly may be accommodated in the cavity.
  • the wearable device 1000 may have at least one acoustic output terminal, and the at least one acoustic output terminal may be connected to the at least one speaker assembly for transmitting sound signals generated by the at least one speaker assembly to the user.
  • the acoustic output can be understood as a structure suitable for transmitting the sound signal produced by the loudspeaker assembly to the user.
  • the speaker assembly when the speaker assembly is a bone conduction speaker, it transmits a mechanical vibration signal to the user's skull through a component in contact with the user (eg, the vibration surface 33 ), so that the user can hear the sound. Therefore, the part that is in contact with the user and transmits mechanical vibration to the user can be understood as the acoustic output.
  • the speaker assembly is an air conduction speaker
  • the diaphragm in the speaker assembly will vibrate and cause the air in the speaker assembly to vibrate (ie, sound waves), and the sound waves can pass through the components on the wearable device 1000.
  • the sound outlet 31 is transmitted to the outside of the wearable device 1000 and further transmitted to the user's ear so that the user can hear the sound, so the structure provided on the wearable device 1000 for extracting sound waves can be understood as an acoustic output end.
  • the acoustic output end and the speaker assembly may be connected by a sound guide element (eg, a sound guide pipe, an acoustic cavity).
  • a sound guide element eg, a sound guide pipe, an acoustic cavity.
  • the acoustic output end is far away from the speaker assembly, so the two can be connected by a sound guide.
  • the air conduction speaker and the wearing piece 100 each have a shell, and the shell of the air conduction speaker and the shell of the wearing piece 100 are both provided with a hole structure and communicate with each other through a sound guide tube.
  • the sound waves generated by the air conduction speaker can be transmitted to the outside of the wearing piece 100 via the sound guide tube and the hole structure of the casing of the wearing piece 100 .
  • the acoustic output end may be a part of the speaker assembly, and the sound produced by the speaker assembly may be directly transmitted to the acoustic output end and then transmitted to the outside of the wearable device 1000 by the acoustic output end.
  • the air-conducting speaker is disposed inside the wearing piece 100
  • the housing of the air-conducting speaker is the housing of the wearing piece 100
  • a hole structure is provided on the housing of the air-conducting speaker.
  • the acoustic output end can be set at any position of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the acoustic output end may be disposed on the lens, frame and/or temple of the glasses.
  • the wearing member 100 is rod-shaped or strip-shaped, for example, when the wearable device 1000 is glasses, the wearing member 100 may be a straight rod-shaped structure, only at the end of the wearing member 100 (away from the visible piece 200) has a slight curvature.
  • the contact surface or point of contact between the wearable device 100 and the user's ear is usually located above the ear, resulting in a long distance between the acoustic output end and the user's ear canal, which affects the sound signal received by the user Strength of.
  • some embodiments of the present specification provide a wearing member 100, which includes at least one concave section, and the concave section can be downward relative to other parts of the wearing member 100 (that is, when the user wears the wearable device 1000, the direction The direction of the user's neck) extends and bulges, so that the wearing member 100 forms a depression, so as to be closer to the tragus of the user.
  • the acoustic output end is located in the concave section, it can be closer to the user's ear canal, which is more convenient for sound transmission.
  • the wearing piece 100 has a larger extension length due to the existence of the concave section, so it has better flexibility, and is more suitable for adaptive deformation according to the user's head shape. This makes it easier for users to wear.
  • the concave section of the wearing member 100 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 2 to 17 .
  • the wearable device 1000 may include at least one wearing member 100 and a visual member 200 connected to the at least one wearing member 100 .
  • At least one concave section 20 and at least one connecting section 10 connected to the at least one concave section 20 are disposed on the wearing piece 100 .
  • the at least one concave section causes the upper edge of the at least one wearing piece to have a downward depression on the at least one wearing piece.
  • the concave section 20 since the concave section 20 is in a folded state, the flexibility of the concave section 20 can be increased. Due to the existence of the concave section 20 , the wearing piece 100 is suitable for adaptive deformation according to the head shape of the user, thereby making it easier for the user to wear.
  • FIGS. 6-12 are schematic structural diagrams of wearing parts according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • at least one concave section 20 has at least one acoustic output end 30 therein.
  • the recessed section 20 may be used to mount the acoustic output end 30 and bring the acoustic output end 30 close to the user's ear.
  • the connecting section 10 can be used for connecting the concave section 20 and the visual element 200 and being erected on the user's auricle.
  • the wearing member 100 may include at least one connecting segment 10 and at least one recessed segment 20, and the recessed segment 20 may be physically connected (eg, adhesively bonded, embedded, welded, riveted, screwed) to the connecting segment 10. , snap connection, etc.); wherein, the concave section 20 has a downward depression 22 on the upper edge of the wearing piece 100, and the concave section 20 has at least one acoustic output end 30 therein.
  • wearable device 1000 may be a head mounted device.
  • the wearing member 100 When the wearable device 1000 is worn by the user, the wearing member 100 may be in contact with the user's ear, for example, the wearing member may be in contact with the user's auricle to maintain stability.
  • the connecting segments 10 When at least one of the connecting segments 10 is used for stable contact with the user's auricle, the acoustic output end 30 extends to the tragus along with the concave segment 20 to be close to the user's external auditory canal, so that the sound transmitted from the acoustic output end 30 is transmitted to the user. .
  • the speaker assembly may be disposed in the concave section 20, connected with the acoustic output end 30, and extend to the tragus along with the concave section 20, so as to transmit sound to the user.
  • the arrangement of the speaker assembly in the concave section 20 is only an example, and those skilled in the art can easily know that the speaker assembly is disposed at any position of the wearable device 1000 and a sound guide element such as a sound guide tube is used to guide the speaker assembly to the concave section 20.
  • the acoustic output 30 of the segment 20, and thus the implementation into the ear, are all simple permutations of this specification.
  • a loudspeaker assembly may be provided in the connecting section 10 .
  • the speaker assembly may be disposed at one end of the connecting segment 10 close to the visual element 200 .
  • the speaker assembly may be disposed at one end of the connecting segment 10 away from the visual element 200 .
  • the upward direction described in this specification may be the direction toward the top of the user's head when the user wears the wearable device 1000 .
  • the downward direction described in this specification may be the direction toward the user's neck.
  • the side of the wearing member 100 facing the user's head is the inner side of the wearing member 100 (ie the inner wall of the wearing member 100 ), and the side opposite to the inner side is the outer side (ie the outer wall of the wearing member 100 ).
  • At least one recessed section 20 may allow at least one acoustic output end 30 to be located near the user's ear.
  • the concave section 20 will be concave downward relative to the connecting section 10, thereby shortening the distance from the user's ear.
  • the acoustic output end 30 arranged in the concave section 20 is thus also closer to the user's ear.
  • the at least one recessed section 20 may position the acoustic output 30 in front of the user's ear.
  • the front of the ear mentioned here can be understood as the side of the user's ear facing the user's face.
  • the concave section 20 when the wearable device 1000 is worn by the user, the concave section 20 may be located on the side of the ear facing the user's eyes, so that the acoustic output end 30 disposed on the concave section 20 The closer to the user's tragus, the sound signal from the acoustic output end 30 can be more easily transmitted to the user's ear.
  • the concave section 20 may be located on the side of the pinna facing away from the user's eyes.
  • the recessed section 20 may position at least one acoustic output 30 behind the ear.
  • the number of the at least one acoustic output end 30 may be multiple, and the multiple acoustic output ends 30 may all be located behind the ear.
  • at least one acoustic output end 30 may be provided both in front of and behind the ear of the user.
  • the number of at least one acoustic output end 30 may be multiple, wherein at least one acoustic output end 30 is disposed in the concave section 20 and is located in front of the user's ear along with the concave section 20 , and at least one acoustic output end 30 is disposed in the connecting section 10 and The accompanying connecting segment 10 is located behind the ear of the user.
  • the setting form and quantity of the acoustic output end 30 can be adjusted according to the actual situation.
  • the recessed section 20 may be provided in any practicable shape.
  • the shape of the concave section 20 can be understood as the shape of the structure of the concave section 20 or the shape of the depression 22 of the concave section 20 .
  • Exemplary shapes of the concave section 20 may include, but are not limited to, a Y shape, a V shape, and a folded shape, and several exemplary concave sections will be described below.
  • the at least one recessed section 20 may include an angled mounting portion 21 and a transition portion 23 .
  • the acoustic output 30 may be provided in the mounting portion 21 and/or the transition portion 23 .
  • At least one of the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 is bent and connected to the connecting section 10 and extends downward, so as to extend toward the tragus when wearing, and shorten the distance between the acoustic output end 30 disposed therein and the external auditory canal.
  • the mounting portion 21 may refer to a portion of the concave section 20 that is closer to the visual element 200 .
  • the transition portion 23 may refer to the portion of the recessed section 20 that is closer to the user's ear.
  • the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may have different or the same shape, and the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 may be connected at any angle to form the concave section 20 with different shapes.
  • the connection of the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 at any angle may mean that the included angle formed by the connection of the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be any angle.
  • the angle of the included angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be in the range of 5 degrees to 150 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the included angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be in the range of 10 degrees to 150 degrees.
  • the angle of the included angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be in the range of 15 degrees to 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the included angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be in the range of 20 degrees to 120 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the included angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be in the range of 30 degrees to 90 degrees. For example, the included angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be 30 degrees, 60 degrees, 90 degrees, or 120 degrees.
  • the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be connected in a detachable manner, such as screw connection or plug connection.
  • the connection segment 10 and the concave segment 20 may be fixedly connected, for example, the connection segment 10 and the concave segment 20 are connected by welding, riveting, bonding and the like.
  • the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may also be directly connected, or may be connected through an adjustment structure.
  • the adjustment structure can be a hinge, a spherical hinge or a telescopic rod. The adjustment structure may allow the transition portion 23 to rotate or translate relative to the mounting portion 21 .
  • FIG. 6 exemplarily shows an embodiment of the recessed section 20 .
  • the concave section 20 may be V-shaped, that is, the concave shape formed by the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 is V-shaped.
  • One end of the transition portion 23 is connected to the part of the connecting segment 10 away from the visual element 200 (for example, the first connecting segment 12 ), and the other end extends downward, and the included angle formed by the transition portion 23 and the connecting segment 10 is approximately 90 degrees .
  • One end of the mounting portion 21 is connected to the portion of the connecting segment 10 close to the visual element 200 (eg, the second connecting segment 14 ), and the other end extends toward the user's tragus and is inclined relative to the connecting segment 10 at a certain angle.
  • the mounting portion 21 is connected with the transition portion 23 and forms a downward V-shaped recess 22 .
  • the length of the transition portion 23 may be less than the length of the mounting portion 21 .
  • the length here may refer to the end-to-end distance of the component.
  • the distance from the end of the transition portion 23 connected to the first connecting section 12 to the end connected to the mounting portion 21 is the length of the transition portion 23 .
  • the cross-sectional dimension of the transition portion 23 may be larger than that of the installation portion 21, and the cross-sectional dimension may more intuitively represent the thickness of the component.
  • the cross-sectional dimension of the transition portion 23 in FIG. 6 may be larger than that of the installation portion 21.
  • the cross-sectional dimension of the portion 21 may mean that the transition portion 23 is thicker than the mounting portion 21 . In other embodiments of the present specification, the cross-sectional dimension of the transition portion 23 may be smaller than or equal to the cross-sectional dimension of the mounting portion 21 . In some embodiments, in order to make the acoustic output end 30 disposed in the concave section closer to the ear when the user wears the wearable device, the angle between the transition part 23 and the first connecting section 12 can be within a certain range. In some embodiments, the included angle between the transition portion 23 and the first connecting segment 12 is between 20 degrees and 120 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the transition portion 23 and the first connecting segment 12 is between 25 degrees and 110 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the transition portion 23 and the first connecting segment 12 is between 30 degrees and 100 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the transition portion 23 and the first connecting segment 12 is between 30 degrees and 90 degrees.
  • FIG. 7 exemplarily shows another embodiment of the recessed section. Similar to FIG. 6 , the concave section 20 shown in FIG. 7 is also V-shaped. Different from FIG. 6 , the connecting section 10 (eg, the bent portion 142 ) in FIG. 7 forms a connection with the end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 and forms a bent structure upward. The bent structure can further increase the extension length of the wearing member 100 , so that the wearing member 100 is relatively more flexible, and its adaptability to the user's head shape is more likely to occur.
  • the connecting section 10 eg, the bent portion 142 in FIG. 7 forms a connection with the end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 and forms a bent structure upward.
  • the bent structure can further increase the extension length of the wearing member 100 , so that the wearing member 100 is relatively more flexible, and its adaptability to the user's head shape is more likely to occur.
  • FIG. 8 exemplarily shows another embodiment of the recessed section.
  • the transition portion 23 and the mounting portion 21 also form a V-shaped concave section 20 .
  • One end of the transition portion 23 is connected with the connecting section 10 to form an arc surface, and the included angle of the arc surface is an acute angle.
  • the other end of the transition portion 23 extends toward the user's tragus.
  • One end of the mounting portion 21 is connected to one end of the transition portion 23 away from the connecting section 10, and one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may be located on the extension line of the connecting section 10 (for example, the first connecting section 12), finally forming a V-shaped The recessed section 20 of the structure.
  • the angle of the recess 22 of the concave section 20 of the V-shaped structure may be less than 75 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the recess 22 of the V-shaped recessed section 20 may be less than 60 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the recess 22 of the V-shaped recessed section 20 may be less than 45 degrees. In some embodiments, the concave angle of the concave section 20 of the V-shaped structure may be less than 30 degrees. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 , the length of the transition portion 23 is smaller than the length of the mounting portion 21 .
  • the cross-sectional dimension of the transition portion 23 is smaller than the cross-sectional dimension of the mounting portion 21 .
  • one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 is located on the extension line of the connecting section 10 , which can be directly connected to the visual element 200 , thereby making the wearing element 100 more suitable for the user to wear.
  • one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may also be located near the extension line of the connecting section 10 .
  • the end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may be located above (the side away from the user's neck) or below (the side close to the user's neck) of the extension line of the connecting segment 10 .
  • FIG. 9 exemplarily shows another embodiment of the recessed section 20 .
  • the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 may be connected to form an L-shaped concave section 20 .
  • One end of the mounting portion 21 is connected to the connecting section 10 (eg, the bending portion 142 ), and the other end extends toward the user's tragus along the left-right direction.
  • One end of the transition portion 23 is connected with the connecting segment 10 (eg, the first connecting segment 12 ) and forms an arc angle with the connecting segment 10 .
  • the other end of the transition portion 23 extends in the up-down direction and is connected with the other end of the mounting portion 21 , and finally forms an L-shaped concave section 20 .
  • the angle of the recess 22 of the L-shaped concave section 20 (ie, the angle formed between the transition portion 23 and the mounting portion 21 ) may be greater than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the recess 22 of the L-shaped recessed section 20 may be greater than 100 degrees. In some embodiments, the angle of the recess 22 of the L-shaped recessed section 20 may be greater than 110 degrees.
  • FIG. 10 exemplarily shows another embodiment of the recessed section 20 .
  • the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 can also form an L-shaped concave section 20 .
  • the length of the transition portion 23 is smaller than the length of the mounting portion 21 .
  • the difference from FIG. 9 is that the angle formed between the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 is substantially a right angle, and the end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 is not located on the extension line of the connecting section 10 .
  • one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may be directly connected to the visual element 200 .
  • one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may be indirectly connected to the visual element.
  • one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may be connected with a connecting segment 10 (eg, the second connecting segment 14 ), and the visual element 200 can be connected through the connecting segment 10 .
  • FIG. 11 exemplarily shows another embodiment of the recessed section 20 .
  • the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 can be connected to form a Y-shaped concave section 20 .
  • the cross-sectional dimension of the mounting portion 21 may be smaller than the cross-sectional dimension of the transition portion 23 .
  • the length of the mounting portion 21 may be greater than the length of the transition portion 23 .
  • the transition portion 23 has a certain arc, so that one end of the transition portion 23 away from the connecting segment 10 (eg, the first connecting segment 12 ) extends toward the user's tragus.
  • the mounting portion 21 is connected to the transition portion 23 away from the connecting section 10 (eg, the second connecting section 14 ) to form a Y-shaped concave section 20 .
  • the bottom of the Y-shaped concave section 20 faces the direction of the user's tragus.
  • the two branches at the top of the Y-shaped concave section 20 are connected with the connecting section 10 (for example, the transition part 23 is connected with the first connecting section 12 , and the mounting part 21 is connected with the second connecting section 14 ).
  • the acoustic output end 30 may be disposed at the top of the Y-shaped concave section 20, eg, at the two branches.
  • the acoustic output end 30 may be disposed at the bottom of the concave section 20 of the Y-shaped structure to shorten the distance from the tragus of the user's ear.
  • the at least one recessed segment 20 may include a plurality of recessed segments 20 .
  • the number of at least one concave section 20 may be two.
  • the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 on the right (referred to as the first concave section for short) is connected with the connecting section 10 (eg, the first connecting section 12 ) and the mounting section 21 to form a V-shaped concave 22 .
  • the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 on the left (referred to as the second concave section for short) is connected to the mounting section 21 of the first concave section and the connecting section (for example, the second connecting section 14), which also forms a V type depression 22.
  • the included angle of the two V-shaped recesses 22 may be the same or different.
  • the concave section 20 can be deformed to obtain a concave section 20 different from the embodiment of the present specification.
  • the shapes of the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 can be adjusted so that the shape of the concave section 20 formed by the mounting portion 21 and the transition portion 23 is U-shaped.
  • the wearer 100 may include a plurality of recessed segments 20, each of which may have a different shape.
  • the wearing member 100 may include two concave sections 20, wherein one of the concave sections 20 is a V-shaped structure shown in FIG. 6, and the other concave section 20 is a Y-shaped structure shown in FIG. 11 .
  • connection segment 10 may include a first connection segment 12 .
  • the transition portion 23 may be connected between the mounting portion 21 and the first connecting segment 12 , and the transition portion 23 is connected to the first connecting segment 12 by bending and extending downward.
  • the first connecting section 12 is connected to the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20, and is used to mount the wearing piece 100 on the user's auricle.
  • the transition portion 23 may extend downward relative to the first connecting segment 12 , thereby forming a protruding recess 22 , thereby forming a concave segment 20 .
  • the recessed section 20 may be directly connected to the sight 200 .
  • one end of the mounting portion 21 away from the transition portion 23 may be located on the extension line of the connecting section 10 (eg, the first connecting section 12 ), so as to be able to be connected with the visual element 200 .
  • the concave section 20 and the visual element 200 may be connected by means of clipping, riveting, nailing, gluing, or the like.
  • the recessed section 20 and the sight member 200 may be integrally formed.
  • the recessed section 20 may be connected to the sight member 200 through additional connecting structures.
  • at least one connecting segment 10 may further include a second connecting segment 14 .
  • the second connecting segment 14 is connected to one end of the mounting portion 21 , and one end of the second connecting segment 14 away from the mounting portion 21 is used for connecting with the visual element 200 .
  • the at least one connection segment 10 may include a first connection segment 12 and a second connection segment 14 .
  • the at least one recessed section 20 may include one recessed section 20 .
  • the concave section 20 is connected between the first connecting section 12 and the second connecting section 14 .
  • the first connecting segment 12 is used to be erected on the auricle.
  • the second connecting section 14 is used for connecting the visual element 200 .
  • the second connecting section 14 may be in a straight shape (as shown in FIG. 6 ), and is connected to one end of the mounting portion 2123 and extends away from the first connecting section 12 .
  • the lower concave section 20 extends downward relative to the first connecting section 12 and the second connecting section 14 , and forms a convex shape relative to the first connecting section 12 and the second connecting section 14 , and is formed with a concave 22 .
  • the concave section 20 may be located on the side of the auricle facing the user's eyes, so that when the user wears it, the concave section 20 extends to the tragus, so that The acoustic output end 30 disposed in the concave section 20 is then close to the tragus, so as to be closer to the user's external auditory canal, which shortens the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the user's ear, thereby making it easier to transmit sound to the user, and can also reduce the noise.
  • the ambient sound interferes with the sound output from the acoustic output end 30 .
  • a depression 22 may be formed on the concave section 20, so that the concave section 20 is in a folded state, so that the flexibility of the concave section 20 can be increased, so that the wearing piece 100 is suitable for the user's head due to the existence of the concave section 20.
  • the shape can be adaptively deformed, making it easier for users to wear.
  • the wearing member 100 may be a one-piece structure, eg, the first connecting section 12, the second connecting section 14 and the recessed section 20 may be integrally formed.
  • the wearing member 100 may also be a split structure, that is, the wearing member 100 may be composed of multiple components.
  • the first connecting section 12 , the second connecting section 14 and the concave section 20 may be independent components, which are respectively formed and then assembled.
  • the first connecting section 12 and the concave section 20 may be a one-piece structure, while the second connecting section 14 is a separate component.
  • the second connecting section 14 and the concave section 20 may be a one-piece structure, while the first connecting section 12 may be a separate component.
  • the connecting segment 10 (eg, the first connecting segment 12 and the second connecting segment 14 ) and the concave segment 20 may be connected in a detachable manner, such as screwing or plugging.
  • the connection segment 10 and the concave segment 20 may be fixedly connected, for example, the connection segment 10 and the concave segment 20 are connected by welding, riveting, bonding and the like.
  • the connection section 10 and the concave section 20 may also be rigidly connected, and may also be connected through an adjustment structure.
  • the adjustment structure may be a hinge, a screw nut, a screw nut, etc. The adjustment structure may make the concave
  • the segment 20 may rotate or translate relative to the connecting segment 10 .
  • the second connecting segment 14 may include a connecting portion 140 and a bent portion 142 .
  • the connecting portion 140 may be used to connect the visual element 200 and the bending portion 142 .
  • the bent portion 142 can be bent relative to the connecting portion 140 , and one end of the bent portion 142 away from the connecting portion 140 is connected to the mounting portion 21 of the concave section 20 .
  • the extension length of the wearing member 100 can be increased, the flexibility of the wearing member 100 can be improved, and the user's comfort when wearing the wearable device 1000 can be improved.
  • the second connection section 14 may include a connected connecting portion 140 and a bending portion 142 , the bending portion 142 may be bent downward relative to the connecting portion 140 , and the bending portion 142 is far from the connection.
  • One end of the part 140 is connected with the mounting part 21 of the concave section 20, and one end of the connecting part 140 away from the bending part 142 is used for connecting with the visual element 200 (not shown in the figure), wherein the connecting part 140 is away from the first connection One side of the segment 12 extends.
  • the bending portion 142 may be bent upward relative to the connecting portion 140 , and the bending portion 142 may be connected to the mounting portion 21 .
  • the end of the bending part 142 in FIG. 7 away from the connecting part 140 also forms a bending angle with the mounting part 21 , which can further increase the extension length of the wearing part 100 , thereby making the The wearing piece 100 is relatively more flexible, and its adaptive deformation to the user's head shape is more likely to occur.
  • the above-mentioned contents about the connecting portion 140 and the bending portion 142 are not limited to the second connecting section 14 .
  • the first connecting segment 12 may also have a connecting portion 140 and a bending portion 142 .
  • the connecting portion 140 of the first connecting segment 12 may be used for connecting with the transition portion 23
  • the bent portion 142 may be connected at an end of the connecting portion 140 away from the transition portion 23 .
  • the bending portion 142 can be bent downward relative to the connecting portion 140 and abut against the back of the user's ear, which can prevent the wearing piece 100 from being detached from the ear.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the second connecting segment 14 may include a first leg 141 and a second leg 143 that are connected to each other.
  • the first leg 141 may be used for connection with the visual element 200
  • the second leg 143 may be used for connection with the mounting part 21 .
  • first leg 141 and the second leg 143 may be fixedly connected, that is, after the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 are connected, the first leg 141 cannot move relative to the second leg 143 .
  • the first leg 141 is movable relative to the second leg 143 .
  • the second connecting segment 14 may include a first leg portion 141 , a second leg portion 143 and an adjustment portion 145 .
  • the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 can be connected by the adjustment part 145 , and the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 can perform operations including relative expansion and/or rotation through the adjustment part 145 .
  • the adjustment part 145 can be a telescopic component, such as a telescopic sleeve rod, etc., and the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 can be stretched through the adjustment part 145 to suit different users, and then It is convenient for users to wear.
  • a telescopic component such as a telescopic sleeve rod, etc.
  • the adjustment part 145 can be a rotating component, such as a hinge structure such as a ball hinge, and the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 can be adjusted up and down through the adjustment part 145, so as to be convenient for different users
  • the biometric features are adjusted to be more suitable for the user to wear.
  • the adjusting part 145 may be a combination of a telescopic assembly and a rotating assembly, so that the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 can be relatively stretched and rotated through the adjusting part 145 .
  • the first leg and the second leg may also be detachably connected, so that the first leg and/or the second leg can be individually replaced and maintained.
  • the adjusting part may be a snap assembly, and the first leg and the second leg can be relatively fixed and removed through the snap assembly.
  • the adjustment portion may further include a screw connection assembly, a threaded connection assembly, a hinge assembly, and the like.
  • first leg portion 141 and the second leg portion 143 may be combined with the connecting portion 140 and the bending portion 142 in the previous embodiments.
  • first leg portion 141 may correspond to the connecting portion 140 in the foregoing embodiments
  • second leg portion 143 may correspond to the bending portion 142 connected thereto.
  • the connecting part 140 and the bending part 142 can be connected by the adjusting part 145 , so that the connecting part 140 and the bending part 142 can be relatively rotated, disassembled, or relatively telescopic and other operations.
  • the connecting portion 140 of the previous embodiments may include a first portion and a second portion.
  • the first leg 141 may correspond to the first part of the connecting part 140
  • the second leg 143 may include the bending part 142 and the second part of the connecting part 140 . After the first leg portion 141 and the second leg portion 143 are connected, the connecting portion 140 and the bending portion 142 can be formed.
  • the second connecting segment 14 may include the first leg portion 141 and the second leg portion 143 and the connecting portion 140 and the bending portion 142 at the same time.
  • the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 may be sub-components of the connection part 140 , that is, the connection part 140 is assembled from the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 .
  • the connecting portion 140 may be assembled from the first leg portion 141 , the second leg portion 143 and the adjusting portion 145 . The relative stretching and rotation of the first leg portion 141 and the second leg portion 143 can be achieved through the adjusting portion 145 , thereby changing the structure of the connecting portion 140 .
  • first leg 141 and the second leg 143 may be two sub-components of an independent component of the second connecting segment 14 other than the connecting portion 140 and the bending portion 142 .
  • the first leg part 141 and the second leg part 143 can form the independent part and then connect with the connecting part 140 or the bending part 142 .
  • the connection portion 140 and the visual element 200 may be connected by the first leg portion 141 and the second leg portion 143 .
  • the first leg 141 may be used to connect the second leg 143 and the visual element 200 .
  • the second leg portion 143 may be used to connect the first leg portion 141 and the connecting portion 140 .
  • the first leg 141 and the second leg 143 may be connected by the adjusting part 145 .
  • the wearable device 1000 when the wearable device 1000 is a smart device, including but not limited to music glasses, cycling glasses, AR devices, and VR devices.
  • the wearable device 1000 is also provided with at least one functional element for implementing different functions.
  • Functional elements may include power supplies, acoustic elements (eg, speaker assemblies), control components (eg, chips), or other electrical elements.
  • acoustic elements eg, speaker assemblies
  • control components eg, chips
  • At least one functional element may be provided on the wearer 100 .
  • the at least one functional element may be provided in the first connecting section 12 , the concave section 20 and/or the second connecting section 14 of the wearing piece 100 .
  • the number of at least one functional element may be one, and the at least one functional element may be provided on the first connecting section 12 , the concave section 20 and/or the second connecting section 14 of the wearing piece 100 .
  • the number of at least one functional element may be plural.
  • a plurality of functional elements may be arranged at the same position of the wearing member 100 , for example, a plurality of functional elements are arranged on the first connecting section 12 , the concave section 20 and/or the second connecting section 14 .
  • a plurality of functional elements may be disposed in different positions of the wearing member 100 , for example, a plurality of functional elements are disposed on the first connecting section 12 , the concave section 20 and the second connecting section 14 dispersedly.
  • the at least one functional element may include a first functional element and a second functional element, the first functional element and the second functional element being electrically connected.
  • the first functional element and the second functional element can be located in the connecting section 10 (eg, the first connecting section 12 ) and the concave section 20 respectively, which can balance the weight on the wearing piece 100 to reduce the pressure of the wearing piece 100 on the bridge of the nose , so that most of the weight of the wearing member 100 is borne by the auricle, and it is also beneficial to reduce the pressure of the visual member 200 on the bridge of the nose.
  • the first functional element and the second functional element may be respectively disposed on the wearing piece 100 corresponding to the user's left and right ears.
  • the wearable device 1000 is glasses, and the wearable device 100 is two temples, corresponding to the left and right ears of the user, respectively, and the first functional element and the second functional element may be respectively disposed on the two temples.
  • the first functional element and the second functional element may be symmetrically disposed near the user's left and right ears.
  • the wearable device 1000 is glasses, and the wearing piece 100 is two temples, corresponding to the left and right ears of the user respectively.
  • both the first functional element and the second functional element are arranged on the temple corresponding to the left ear of the user or the temple corresponding to the left ear of the user.
  • the first functional element and the second functional element may be the same electrical component or may be different electrical components.
  • the first functional element may be a power supply
  • the second functional element may be a chip
  • a speaker element eg, a speaker assembly
  • the first functional element is a chip
  • the second functional element is a power supply.
  • the acoustic element 35 may be detachable relative to the wearer 100 or fixedly attached relative to the wearer 100 .
  • the acoustic element 35 is detachably connected to the concave section 20 and/or the connecting section 10 , such as may be disposed on the first connecting section 12 or the second connecting section 14 .
  • the acoustic element 35 is fixedly connected to the wearing piece 100 by directly adhering, so that the acoustic element 35 cannot be detached from the wearing piece 100 .
  • the at least one functional element may all be mounted inside the wearer 100 .
  • an accommodating cavity 120 may be opened inside the wearing piece 100 , and both functional elements (eg, the first functional element and the second functional element) may be accommodated in the accommodating cavity 120 .
  • the functional elements eg, the first functional element and the second functional element
  • the functional elements may also both be mounted on the wearing piece 100 from the outside of the wearing piece 100 .
  • some of the plurality of functional elements are mounted on the inside of the wearing piece 100
  • others eg, the second functional element
  • FIG. 5 exemplarily shows an embodiment in which a functional element is connected to the wearing piece 100 .
  • the functional element may include at least one acoustic element 35 , and the acoustic element 35 is detachably connected to the first connecting section 12 , the concave section 20 and/or the second connecting section 14 , and the acoustic element 35 can output through the acoustic End 30 sounds.
  • the outer side of the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 ie, the side of the transition portion 23 away from the user’s head when the user wears the wearable device 1000 ) is provided with a hole for accommodating the acoustic element 35 .
  • the acoustic element 35 can be at least partially embedded in the card slot 230 and connected to the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 .
  • the acoustic elements 35 may also be electrically connected to other functional elements within the wearable 100 (eg, components such as chips and power supplies).
  • functional elements such as the acoustic element 35 , the power supply, and the chip (also referred to as the movement) can be integrated into one, and when the assembly of the functional elements is clamped on the concave section 20 , the wearing piece 100 can be endowed with audio function.
  • FIG. 5 is for illustrative purposes only, and is not intended to limit the arrangement of the acoustic elements 35 .
  • the acoustic element 35 may be connected to other components of the wearer 100 .
  • the acoustic element 35 may be connected to the mounting portion 21 .
  • the acoustic element 35 may be connected to the wearable 100 by other means of connection.
  • the acoustic element 35 and the concave section 20 are provided with mutually adapted plug structures, and the acoustic element 35 can be plugged on the transition portion 23 to be connected with the transition portion 23 .
  • the wearer 100 may include a fastening device by which the acoustic element 35 may be connected to the recessed section 20 (eg, the transition portion 23 ).
  • the acoustic element 35 may include a diaphragm and a magnetic circuit assembly.
  • the diaphragm may be in the shape of a rectangular film.
  • the diaphragm when the acoustic element 35 is mated with the slot 230 , the diaphragm may be located in the slot 230 .
  • the diaphragm may be disposed toward the bottom wall of the card slot 230 .
  • the magnetic circuit assembly can provide the magnetic field. Magnetic fields can be used to convert signals containing acoustic information into mechanical vibration signals.
  • the diaphragm is connected with the magnetic circuit assembly, and the mechanical vibration signal generated by the magnetic circuit assembly can be transmitted to the diaphragm to cause the diaphragm to vibrate mechanically. Sound is produced when the diaphragm mechanically vibrates.
  • the manner in which the sound is generated differs according to the type of the acoustic element 35 .
  • the acoustic element 35 is an air conduction speaker
  • the diaphragm can cause the air to vibrate, which is then transmitted to the outside of the wearable device 1000 through the sound transmission structure (eg, the sound outlet 31 ) and received by the user, so that the user can hear it. sound.
  • the diaphragm may be connected with the sound transmission structure (eg, the vibration surface 33 ), thereby causing the sound transmission structure to vibrate.
  • the sound transmission structure can transmit mechanical vibration to the user, so that the user can hear the sound.
  • the sound transmission structure may be disposed on the side wall of the transition portion 23 facing the ear, so that the user can better receive the sound.
  • the wearable device 1000 may further include a functional hole 40 .
  • the functional hole 40 may be provided on the visual element 200 and/or the wearing element 100 .
  • Functional elements eg, sensors
  • the wearable device 1000 when the wearable device 1000 is a smart device, for example, music glasses, cycling glasses, AR helmets, VR helmets, and the like.
  • the sensors provided on the wearable device 1000 can be used to detect and collect data related to the user.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the positions of the sound outlet hole, the vibration surface and the function hole in the wearing piece shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the inner side of the wearing member 100 may also be provided with functional holes 40 , and functional elements such as sensors (eg, disposed in the cavity of the wearing member 100 ) provided in the wearing member 100 can perform related operations through the functional holes 40 . For example, probe, collect user-related data.
  • the functional hole 40 may be a detection hole of a sensor, and relevant detection may be performed through the detection hole.
  • the detection hole may be a detection hole of an infrared sensor or a distance sensor, so as to detect whether the wearing device 100 is used by the user. purpose of wearing.
  • the sensor can automatically activate the electrical components in the wearable device 100, for example, activate the communication component to communicate with the terminal device (eg, mobile phone).
  • the functional hole 40 may also be a detection hole of an optical sensor, which can detect whether the wearing piece 100 is worn and monitor the user's biological signs, for example, detect the user's heart rate or blood oxygen content.
  • the sensor can also alert the user when the detected biological sign is out of balance and there is a potential harm.
  • the function hole 40 may also be a sound pickup hole for receiving a user's voice signal, so that the user can control the wearable device 1000 by voice, for example, make a call, play music, or inquire about road conditions and weather.
  • one functional hole 40 may perform one or more functions.
  • the functional hole 40 may perform a single function (eg, for receiving the user's voice, monitoring the user's biological signs, etc.) as described in the previous embodiments.
  • the functional hole 40 can be used as a sound pickup hole, and can also be used as a detection hole of an optical sensor.
  • the functional hole 40 may be provided on the first connecting segment 12 , the concave segment 20 and/or the second connecting segment 14 .
  • the number of functional holes 40 may be one, and one functional hole 40 may be provided on one of the first connecting section 12 , the concave section 20 or the second connecting section 14 .
  • the wearing member 100 may be provided with a plurality of functional holes 40 to perform different functions respectively.
  • a plurality of functional holes 40 may be provided in different parts of the wearing member 100 .
  • the first connecting segment 12 is provided with at least one sound pickup hole
  • the concave segment 20 is provided with at least one detection hole.
  • the first connecting section 12 and the concave section 20 are each provided with at least one sound pickup hole
  • the second connecting section 14 is provided with at least one detection hole.
  • the acoustic output end 30 may include a sound transmission structure, and the sound transmission structure may be understood as a component in communication with the speaker assembly, and the sound signal generated by the speaker assembly may be transmitted to the transmission through a sound guide element (eg, a sound guide tube).
  • the sound structure is then transmitted to the outside of the wearable device 1000 through the sound transmission structure and received by the user.
  • the sound transmission structure may include a sound outlet 31 and/or a vibration surface 33 , and the speaker assembly disposed in the wearing member 100 transmits sound to the user through the sound outlet 31 and/or the vibration surface 33 .
  • the sound outlet 31 can be understood as a hole that communicates with the speaker assembly, and the sound signal generated by the speaker assembly can be transmitted to the sound outlet 31 through a sound guide element (eg, a sound guide tube, an acoustic cavity), and then pass through the sound outlet. 31 is delivered to the outside of the wearable device 1000 and received by the user.
  • the vibration surface 33 can be understood as a component that is in contact with the user and transmits mechanical vibration.
  • the sound transmission structure ie, the sound outlet 31 or the vibration surface 33 ) provided on the acoustic output end 30 may be determined according to the type of the speaker assembly.
  • the sound transmission structure may be the sound outlet hole 31 .
  • the concave section 20 is provided with a sound outlet hole 31, and the sound outlet hole 31 can be close to the user's ear along with the concave section 20, so as to transmit sound to the user.
  • the sound outlet hole 31 may be disposed at a position where the concave section 20 contacts the user's head.
  • a sound outlet 31 is provided on the inner side of the concave section 20 that is close to the user's head, so as to transmit sound to the user.
  • the number of the sound holes 31 can be set to 1, 2, 3 or more. For example, as shown in FIG. 14 , two sound outlet holes 31 are provided at the inner edge of the concave section 20 to be as close to the user's external auditory canal as possible when the user wears it, so as to improve the user's hearing effect.
  • the sound outlet hole 31 may be disposed near the position where the concave section 20 contacts the user's head.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the position of the sound outlet hole in the wearing piece shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the edge of the concave section 20 facing the tragus may be provided with a sound outlet 31 , and the sound outlet 31 will not be affected by the scalp. Therefore, even in the wearing state, the sound outlet hole 31 can still be partially exposed to the air and face the user's external auditory canal, which is more conducive to improving the sound output effect to the user's external auditory canal.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of the position of the sound outlet hole in the wearing piece shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the side of the concave section 20 facing the tragus may be provided with a sound outlet 31 , and the sound outlet 31 at this position will not be blocked by the scalp at all.
  • the sound hole 31 can also be completely exposed to the air and face the user's external auditory canal, which can further improve the sound output effect of the external auditory canal.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of the position of the sound outlet hole in the wearing piece shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the inner side of the concave section 20 and the side facing the tragus are provided with sound outlet holes 31 , and the sound outlet holes 31 on both sides can transmit the sound to the external auditory canal of the user in two directions sound to further enhance the sound output.
  • the sound transmission structure may be the vibration surface 33 .
  • the vibrating surface 33 may be disposed on the inner side of the concave section 20 that is close to the scalp.
  • the sound transmission structure may include a vibration surface 33 and a sound outlet hole 31 .
  • the vibrating surface 33 can be disposed on the inner side of the concave section 20 that is close to the scalp, and can directly contact the user when the user wears the glasses 1, so as to receive the mechanical vibration signal transmitted by the user's voice.
  • the sound outlet 31 may be disposed on the side of the concave section 20 facing the tragus.
  • the component structure of the wearable device 1000 may also have other embodiments, which are not listed one by one in this specification, and the specific structure and shape thereof are not limited.
  • the present specification discloses a wearable device 1000 , a visible part 200 and a wearing part 100 thereof.
  • the concave segment 20 is physically connected with the connecting segment 10, and the concave segment 20 is formed with a downward depression, so that the concave segment 20 is In the folded state, the flexibility of the concave section 20 can be increased, so that the wearing piece 100 is suitable for adaptive deformation according to the user's head shape due to the existence of the concave section 20, so that it is easier for the user to wear, and the concave section 20 also There is at least one acoustic output end 30, so that the acoustic output end 30 can be pulled into the distance from the user's ear with the concave section 20, which is more convenient for sound transmission to the user, so that the user does not need to insert the acoustic output end 30 into the external auditory canal. Sound transmission can be achieved, the wearing comfort of the wearing piece 100 is improved, and the wearing difficulty is reduced.
  • the wearable device 1000 may be glasses, including cycling glasses, sunglasses, myopia glasses, AR/VR glasses, and the like.
  • the wearable device 1000 can be a kind of cycling glasses.
  • the cycling glasses can be suitable for users to wear while cycling, driving or exercising.
  • the wearing member 100 is generally a rod-like structure (eg, temples), strips, or belt-like structures (eg, webbing).
  • the wearing piece 100 lacks a shield for shielding the ears, and the user may be disturbed by wind noise when using it.
  • a user wears glasses eg, cycling glasses
  • they may be in a state of high-speed movement, headwind movement, and crosswind movement, and the wind noise interference is more intense.
  • wind noise interference will also affect the user's ability to receive sound signals from the wearable device 1000, resulting in the user's inability to hear clearly or fully. There is no sound, which further reduces the user experience.
  • the present specification also involves more improvements to the structure of the wearing member 100, so that the wearing member 100 has the function of reducing wind noise.
  • the wearing piece 100 may include a wind noise reduction component, and the wind noise reduction component is configured to isolate the ear from the outside to a certain extent when the user wears the wearable device 1000 to reduce the wind noise received by the user interference.
  • the wind noise reduction assembly will be described in detail below with reference to the embodiments in FIGS. 18-23 .
  • the wearable device 1000 may include a visual member 200 , a wearing member 100 , and a wind noise reduction component disposed on the wearing member 100 .
  • the wind noise reduction assembly may include an isolation member, and the isolation member may be disposed at a position of the wearing member 100 close to the ear so as to shield the user's ear and reduce the interference of wind noise at the user's ear.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device provided with a spacer according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 18 , the wearable device may include a visual member 200 , two wearing members 100 disposed on both ends of the visual member 200 , and a spacer 300 disposed on the wearing member 100 .
  • the wearable device 1000 may be a kind of glasses.
  • the wearing piece 100 may be temples.
  • Viewer 200 may include frame 210 and lens 220 .
  • Lenses 220 may be disposed on the frame 210 to form rimmed glasses.
  • the two temples are rotatably connected to both sides of the frame 210, and the spacer 300 is physically connected to the temples for wrapping the ears.
  • the viewing member 200 may only include two lenses 220 and a connecting member between the two lenses 220, and the temple is connected to one side of the lenses 220, thereby forming a rimless pair of glasses.
  • the glasses may further include a frame 210 without the lenses 220 installed, and the temples are connected with the frame 210 to form decorative glasses.
  • the spacer 300 may be combined with the recessed section 20 and/or the connecting section 10 of one or more of the foregoing embodiments.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the spacer and the wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the spacer and the wearing piece according to some embodiments of the present specification;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure according to the present specification A schematic structural diagram of the connection between the spacer and the wearing piece shown in some embodiments. As shown in FIGS.
  • the wearing piece 100 may include at least one connecting section 10 and at least one concave section 20 , the concave section 20 is physically connected with the connecting section 10 , and the concave section 20 makes the upper edge of the wearing piece 100 wear
  • the member 100 has a downward depression 22 .
  • the spacer 300 may be physically connected to the concave section 20 for wrapping the ear and reducing wind noise interference.
  • the recessed section 20 and/or the spacer 300 may have at least one acoustic output 30 within it (not shown in FIGS. 19-21 ).
  • the concave section 20 When the wearing member 100 is erected on the user's auricle, the concave section 20 is located on the side of the auricle facing the user's eyes, so that when the user wears it, the concave section 20 extends to the tragus.
  • the acoustic output end 30 When the acoustic output end 30 is disposed on the concave section 20, the acoustic output end 30 disposed in the concave section 20 is close to the tragus, so as to be closer to the user's external auditory canal, and the acoustic output end 30 and the user's ear are drawn closer Therefore, it is more convenient to transmit the sound to the user, and the interference of the ambient sound to the sound output from the acoustic output end 30 can also be reduced.
  • the concave section 20 can facilitate isolation.
  • the fixed connection of the piece 300 wraps the ear, preventing the ear from directly contacting the wind, reducing the probability of turbulence, and achieving the effect of reducing wind noise.
  • the spacer 300 may be connected with the recessed section 20 and/or the connecting section 10 .
  • the spacer 300 may be connected to the recessed section 20 only.
  • the spacer 300 may only be connected with the connecting segment.
  • the spacer 300 may be connected to both the concave section 20 and the connecting section 10 at the same time.
  • Figure 18 exemplarily shows one of the embodiments in which the spacer is connected to the wearer.
  • the shape of the spacer 300 is substantially circular.
  • the spacer 300 is connected to the side of the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 away from the mounting portion 21 .
  • FIG. 19 exemplarily shows another embodiment of the connection of the spacer to the wearer.
  • the wearing piece 100 shown in FIG. 19 may be the same as the wearing piece 100 shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the difference is that the spacer 300 shown in FIG. 19 is an annular structure. Both ends of the ring-shaped spacer 300 are connected to the side of the transition portion 23 away from the mounting portion 21 . One end is close to the first connecting segment 12 and is connected with the first connecting segment 12 . The other end is far away from the first connecting segment 12 .
  • the isolator 300 shown in FIG. 19 is connected to the transition portion 23 and the first connection section 12 at the same time, which improves the connection strength between the isolator 300 and the wearing member 100 to a certain extent.
  • the wearable device 1000 may include two wearing parts 100, which are respectively used to be mounted on the left and right ears of the user.
  • the wearing part 100 erected on the user's right ear may be referred to as a right ear wearing part
  • the wearing part 100 erected on the user's left ear may be referred to as a left ear wearing part.
  • the ends of the left ear-wearing part and the right ear-wearing part far from the visible part 200 may be connected by at least one spacer 300 .
  • the left ear wearing part or the right ear wearing part referred to here refers to the part of the wearable device 1000 for the user to wear.
  • the left ear wearing portion and the right ear wearing portion may be different parts of the same wear piece 100 .
  • the wearing piece 100 is the annular headband shown in FIG. 4
  • the left ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part respectively refer to the parts of the wearing piece 100 that are in stable contact with the left and right ears of the user respectively.
  • the left ear wearing portion and the right ear wearing portion may also be different wearing pieces 100 .
  • the wearing part 100 is the temple shown in FIG.
  • the two wearing parts are temples mounted on the left and right ears of the user respectively, the temple in contact with the left ear can be called the left ear wearing part, and The temple that contacts the right ear may be referred to as the right ear wearing part.
  • one end of the spacer 300 may be connected to the side wall of the transition portion 23 away from the mounting portion 21 .
  • Exemplary connection means may include bonding, snapping, stapling, and the like.
  • the spacer 300 may be a strip-shaped structure or a sheet-shaped structure, eg, a spacer sheet, a spacer bar, and the like.
  • the end of the spacer 300 away from the transition portion 23 may be provided with a magnetic material (eg, a magnet), and the magnetic material may be used to connect other spacers 300 .
  • a magnetic material eg, a magnet
  • the spacers 300 on the wearing parts 100 on both sides of the left and right ears can be connected. Both the left ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part are provided with a spacer 300 , and one end of each spacer 300 away from the transition part 23 connected thereto is provided with a magnetic material.
  • the end of the spacer 300 disposed on the left ear-wearing part with the magnetic material can be attached to the end of the spacer 300 disposed on the right ear-wearing part with the magnetic material, and the two spacers 300 surround the back of the user's head to isolate the
  • the piece 300 can not only wrap the ear to avoid direct contact between the ear and the wind, but also can fix the wearing piece 100, prevent the wearing piece 100 from falling off the ear, and is convenient to wear.
  • the end of the spacer 300 away from the transition portion 23 may also be provided with structures such as Velcro, a buckle, etc., so as to facilitate interconnection with other spacers 300 .
  • the spacer 300 may be an elastic strip-shaped structure, eg, a webbing.
  • the wearable 100 may include a left ear wearing portion and a right ear wearing portion in stable contact with the user's left and right ears.
  • the ends of the left ear wearing part and the right ear wearing part remote from the sight member 200 may be connected by a spacer 300 (eg, a webbing).
  • a spacer 300 eg, a webbing.
  • one end of the spacer 300 is connected and fixed with the transition part 23 of the right ear wearing part, and the other end is connected and fixed with the transition part 23 on the left ear wearing part (not shown in the figure). ).
  • the spacer 300 can not only wrap the ear to avoid direct contact between the ear and the wind, but also play a role in fixing the wearing element 100 to prevent the wearing element 100 from falling off the ear. In addition, due to the elasticity of the spacer 300, the wearing element 100 The wearable device 1000 can adapt to different sizes of head shapes.
  • the spacer 300 may be an elastic element, for example, the spacer 300 may be made of an elastic material so as to have certain elasticity.
  • Exemplary elastic materials may include silicone, rubber, spandex, polyester, polyester, and the like.
  • the spacer 300 may be made of a water-absorbing material to absorb sweat from the ear and keep the ear dry and comfortable.
  • Exemplary absorbent materials may include sponges, cotton cloths, and the like.
  • the isolation member 300 may be made of a thermal insulation material, so as to avoid chapped ear skin in cold weather.
  • Exemplary thermal materials may include rock wool, glass wool, fleece, and the like.
  • the spacer 300 may include a fixed portion and a flexible portion.
  • the fixing part can be connected with the wearing member 100 to ensure the structural strength of the isolation member 300 .
  • the flexible portion can be disposed toward the auricle. Since the flexible portion has a certain flexibility, it can be used to buffer the force between the fixed portion and the ear to protect the ear.
  • the flexible portion may be made of materials such as silicone and rubber.
  • the flexible part may be a part of the spacer 300 , and the fixed part may be a separate part, and is separately provided on the spacer 300 for connecting with the wearing part 100 .
  • the spacer 300 may be made of elastic materials including silicone, rubber, etc., so the spacer 300 has certain flexibility.
  • the spacer 300 is connected to the wearing member 100 by providing a fixed portion with high hardness.
  • the spacer 300 may be a composite structure fabricated from various materials.
  • the spacer 300 is a composite structure formed by stacking an elastic structure (for example, made of silicone) and a rigid structure (for example, made of stainless steel).
  • the elastic structure is located on the side close to the user's ear, and the user's ear is protected by the elastic structure.
  • the rigid structure is located on the side away from the user's ear, and is connected to the wearing piece 100 through the rigid structure.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the isolation connector and the wearing device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the wearable device 1000 may include an isolation connector 400 connected to the wearing member 100 , and the isolation member 300 is connected and fixed with the isolation connector 400 to achieve physical connection with the wearing member 100 .
  • the first connecting segment 12 is erected on the auricle of the user. Therefore, in order for the spacer 300 to better wrap the ear, the spacer connector 400 can be connected to the concave section 20 , and the spacer 300 can be disposed on the side of the transition portion 23 away from the mounting portion 21 .
  • the isolation connector 400 may include a connecting plate 401 and a card plate 402 extending from a portion of the edge of the connecting plate 401 .
  • the shape of the connecting plate 401 corresponds to the shape of the side surface of the transition portion 23 .
  • the clamping plate 402 can be clamped on the edge of the transition portion 23 to realize the detachable connection between the isolation connector 400 and the transition portion 23 .
  • a snap portion 4021 may be provided on the card board 402 , and the spacer 300 may be connected and fixed to the isolation connector 400 through the snap portion 4021 to realize physical connection with the wearing element 100 .
  • the isolation connecting member 400 may be fixedly connected to the wearing member 100 by means of fixing members (not shown) such as screws, welding, or integral molding, which are not listed here.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the isolation connector and the wearing device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the isolation connector 400 can also be connected to the connecting segment 10 , for example, the connector can be connected to the first connecting segment 12 and/or the second connecting segment 14 , as long as the isolation member 300 can It is sufficient to at least partially wrap the ear.
  • the isolation connector 400 is connected to the second connecting segment 14 .
  • the isolation connector 400 may be a snap ring of a semi-closed configuration. At least a pair of clamping holes 101 are oppositely disposed on the opposite side surfaces of the first connecting section 12 and/or the second connecting section 14, and the two ends of the connecting piece 400 are respectively clamped in the locking holes 101, so as to isolate the connecting piece 400 from the other. Physical connection of the wearing piece 100 .
  • the isolation connector 400 can not only be detachably connected to the wearing device 100, but also realize the adjustment of the position of the connector 400 to adapt to different sizes of head shapes.
  • the wearing member 100 and the isolation member 300 may be connected through a structure such as a buckle assembly, a hook assembly, or the like.
  • the wearing member 100 may be provided with an isolation fitting, and the isolation fitting may be a structure such as a through hole, a buckle, a hook, etc.
  • the isolation member 300 may be matched with the isolation fitting to realize the connection with the wearing member 100 .
  • the isolation fitting may be combined with the securing portion of one or more of the preceding embodiments.
  • isolation fittings may be provided on the fixed portion to improve connection strength.
  • the component structure of the wearable device 1000 may also have other embodiments, which are not listed one by one in this specification, and the specific structure and shape thereof are not limited.
  • this specification discloses a wearable device 1000, in particular, the wearable device 1000 may be a kind of glasses.
  • the isolation member 300 By disposing the isolation member 300 on the wearing member 100, direct contact between the ear and the wind can be avoided, and the wearing member 100 can be fixed to prevent the wearing member 100 from falling off the ear.
  • the movable connection between the wearing member 100 and the isolation connector 400 is realized, and then the position of the isolation connector 400 relative to the wearing member 100 can be adjusted according to actual needs, so that the wearable device 1000 can adapt to Head shapes of different sizes.
  • the spacer 300 and the spacer connector 400 may be combined into one component.
  • the first connecting segment 12 may be integrally formed with the spacer 300 to be mounted on the user's head and shield the user's ears.
  • the first connecting section 12 may be omitted, and the spacer 300 may be disposed on the transition portion 23 of the concave section 20 .
  • the wearable device 1000 is generally provided with a plurality of functional elements so that the wearable device 1000 has different functions.
  • the wearable device 1000 can be a kind of audio glasses, and the audio glasses can be provided with a plurality of functional elements, including a power supply, an acoustic element (for example, a speaker assembly), a control element (for example, a chip (also called a movement), MCU), communication components, etc.
  • acoustic elements, power supplies, etc. can be classified as peripheral elements.
  • the power supply can be used to provide power to other functional units.
  • the acoustic elements can play and/or receive audio signals.
  • Control components eg, chips, MCUs
  • core elements e.g., core elements.
  • the acoustic element may include a speaker assembly, and the sound signal generated by the speaker assembly may be output through the acoustic output end 30 (eg, the sound outlet 31 , the vibration surface 33 ) in the foregoing embodiments so that the user can hear the sound.
  • the acoustic element may include a microphone assembly, and the microphone assembly may be used to receive sound signals (eg, voice signals, noise signals) from the outside and convert them into electrical signals to implement functions such as calls, voice, and human-computer interaction.
  • the acoustic element may include a microphone assembly and a speaker assembly, so that the wearable device 1000 has both audio playback and reception functions.
  • the control circuit assembly can process data from and control other functional elements in the wearable device 1000 .
  • the control circuit assembly may process data related to the communication assembly and pass audio data to the speaker assembly.
  • the control circuit components may control the operational states of other functional elements in the wearable device 1000 (e.g., communication components, power supplies, processors, etc.). For example, when the power of the power supply is below a threshold, the control circuit assembly may control the power supply to enter a power saving mode in which the power supply operates with lower power.
  • Communication components can be used for the exchange of information or data.
  • communication components may be used for communication between functional elements of wearable device 1000 (eg, control circuit components, processors, power supplies, acoustic elements, etc.).
  • the power supply can send information about the remaining power to the communication component, which can send the information to the processor.
  • the communication component may be used for the wearable device 1000 to communicate with a cell phone, tablet, or other wearable device, or the like.
  • one or more functional elements may be provided on the wearer 100 .
  • the functional element may further include the sensor in the foregoing embodiment, and the sensor may be disposed in the functional hole 40 of the wearing piece 100 .
  • the number of wearing parts 100 may be two, corresponding to the left and right ears of the user respectively.
  • the wearing member 100 is two temples that are mounted on the left and right auricles of the user.
  • the wearing member 100 may be an annular headband, and two ends of the annular headband are respectively connected to two ends of the visual member 200 .
  • the wearing piece 100 may include a left ear wearing portion and a right ear wearing portion, corresponding to the user's left and right ears, respectively.
  • the wearable device 1000 includes a visual member 200 and two wearing members 100 (which may be referred to as a first wearing member and a second wearing member) connected at both ends of the visual member 200 .
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of signal transmission between two wearing parts according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the first wearable piece and the second wearable piece respectively include a communication component (eg, the first communication component 810 and the second communication component 820 ), and the communication component can be used to communicate between the two wearable pieces 100 .
  • the signals between the two wearing pieces 100 may refer to signals generated by functional elements (eg, the first peripheral element 610 and the second peripheral element 620 ) on the two wearing pieces 100 .
  • the speaker assembly may include a first speaker assembly and a second speaker assembly.
  • the power source may include a first power source and a second power source.
  • the first speaker assembly and the first power supply assembly may be disposed on the first wearing piece, and the second speaker assembly and the second power supply assembly may be disposed on the second wearing piece.
  • Signals generated by elements on the first wearable piece can be transmitted to elements of the second wearable piece, for example, sound signals generated by the first speaker assembly can be passed through the communication assembly (through the first communication assembly 810 to the second communication assembly 820) into the second speaker assembly.
  • the wearing piece may further include: control circuit components (eg, the first control circuit component 710 and the second control circuit component 720 ), the control circuit components may communicate with the elements on the two wearable components through the communication component .
  • the first speaker assembly can be a main speaker
  • the second speaker assembly can be a sub speaker
  • the control circuit assembly can control the main speaker to be turned on or off
  • the communication component can send a corresponding operation signal to the sub speaker when the main speaker is turned on or off, Causes the sub speakers to be turned on or off at the same time.
  • the number of control circuit components may be unlimited.
  • the number of control circuit components may be one, which may be provided on the first wearing piece or the second wearing piece.
  • wired and/or wireless communication may be performed between the control circuit assembly and elements on the first wearing piece (eg, the first speaker assembly, the first power source, etc.) through the communication assembly.
  • Wireless communication may be performed between the control circuit assembly and elements on the second wearable piece (eg, the second microphone assembly, the second speaker assembly, the second battery, etc.) through the communication assembly.
  • the communication component may be a wired communication component, for example, the communication component may include a wire set (not shown in the figure, a wire channel for the wire set to pass through is provided in the wearing member 100 and/or the visual member 200, The wire group can respectively connect the first element and the second element and the control circuit assembly through the wire channel, so that the elements on the left and right wearing parts can be controlled by the control circuit assembly.
  • the communication component may include a wire set (not shown in the figure, a wire channel for the wire set to pass through is provided in the wearing member 100 and/or the visual member 200,
  • the wire group can respectively connect the first element and the second element and the control circuit assembly through the wire channel, so that the elements on the left and right wearing parts can be controlled by the control circuit assembly.
  • the communication component may be a wireless communication component, and the wireless communication component may establish a communication connection between the components and between the components and the control circuit component by means of wireless communication.
  • the control circuit assembly can control the element, for example, the first speaker assembly can be controlled to generate sound signals, and the second speaker assembly can be controlled to stop generating sound signals.
  • the wireless communication method of the wireless communication component may include any one of wireless communication methods such as Bluetooth, infrared, Ultra Wideband (BW), Near Field Magnetic Induction (NFMI).
  • the acoustic element and the communication component may be combined into a single unit that has both the function of the acoustic element (eg, the function of playing a sound signal) and the function of exchanging information or data.
  • the acoustic element may further include a microphone assembly, and the microphone assembly may communicate with the speaker assembly through the communication assembly.
  • the microphone assembly can convert the sound signal received by it into an electrical signal and transmit it to the speaker assembly through the communication assembly, and the speaker assembly can convert the electrical signal into an acoustic signal and transmit it to the user.
  • the speaker assembly may be integrated on a chip.
  • the movement may include a processor and communication components, among others.
  • different users may have different head shapes (ie, head shapes) or head sizes, so different users wearing the same wearable device 1000 may have different wearing experiences.
  • the head size may include the left-right width of the head (ie the width of the forehead or the distance between the temples on both sides) and the front-to-back length of the head (ie the distance from the back of the head to the forehead).
  • a user with a larger head size may feel a stronger squeeze when wearing the wearable device 1000 .
  • the wearable device 1000 has a poor fit with the user's head, and the wearable device 1000 may fall.
  • the user's head shape and head size may also cause changes in the distance between the acoustic output 30 on the wearing piece and the ear, affecting the sound transmission of the acoustic output 30 .
  • the acoustic output end 30 may be located in front of the ear and far from the ear.
  • the acoustic output end 30 may be located in the front and rear of the ear and far from the ear.
  • some embodiments of the present specification also provide a size-adjustable wearable device 1000, which can adjust the wearable device by replacing different sizes of visible parts, wearing parts, and connecting structures connecting the visible parts and the wearing parts
  • the size of the device 1000 and/or the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the user's ear can not only effectively improve the user's wearing experience, but also shorten the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the user's ear, and improve the sound transmission effect of the acoustic output end 30 .
  • Fig. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic structural disassembly diagram of the wearable device in the embodiment of Fig. 25
  • Fig. 27 is a structural disassembly of the wearable device in the embodiment of Fig. 25
  • the wearable device 1000 may include a visual element 200 and a wearable element 100 connected with the visual element 200 .
  • the wearable device 1000 is glasses, the visual element 200 may include a lens assembly, and the wearing element 100 may include temples.
  • the glasses can be rimless glasses (ie, with lenses and no frames), rimmed glasses (ie, with lenses and frames), or decorative glasses (ie, with frames and no frames).
  • the wearing member 100 may include two temples, each of which is detachably connected to the viewing member 200, respectively.
  • the two temples can be erected on the user's auricle to provide stable support for the glasses; on the other hand, the two temples can generate a clamping force on the user's head, so that the glasses can be more stably Wear it on the user's head.
  • the wearing member 100 may also include an adjustment member 150 .
  • Two ends of the adjusting member 150 are respectively connected with the temple and the lens assembly, so as to realize the connection between the temple and the lens assembly.
  • the adjustment member 150 and the lens assembly are detachably connected, so that the adjustment member 150 of different specifications can be replaced, and the length of the temple can be adjusted by replacing the adjustment member 150 with different lengths, so as to adapt to different users, so as to solve the problem of A technical problem where temples that are too long or too short will make the user feel uncomfortable wearing them.
  • the visual element 200 may include two positioning ends 240 disposed on the lens assembly, and two positioning ends 240 may be provided on both sides of the lens assembly to correspond to the two temples. Wherein, one end of the adjusting member 150 is detachably connected to the positioning end 240 of the lens assembly. In the following, only the matching relationship between one positioning end 240 and one temple is taken as an example for description.
  • the positioning end 240 of the lens assembly is provided with a buckle portion 241
  • the end of the adjusting member 150 connected to the lens assembly is provided with a buckle portion 152 .
  • the buckle portion 241 may be a clamping block
  • the engaging portion 152 may be a clamping slot, and the clamping block is inserted into the clamping slot to realize the connection between the temple and the lens assembly.
  • the engaging portion 152 when the lens assembly is composed of two lenses and a connecting piece between the two lenses to form a rimless glasses, the engaging portion 152 can be a snap groove, and the engaging portion 241 can be extended along the edge of the lens The clamping block is inserted into the clamping slot to complete the assembly of the temple and the lens assembly. When disassembly is required, the engaging portion 152 and the engaging portion 241 can be directly separated.
  • the engaging portion 152 when the lens assembly includes a frame, the engaging portion 152 can be a slot, and the engaging portion 241 can be a block provided on the edge of the frame, and the block can be inserted into the slot to complete the lens. Assembly of legs and lens assemblies. in some alternative embodiments.
  • the engaging portion 152 can be a snap block, and the snap portion 241 can be a snap slot provided on the edge of the frame, and the temple and the lens assembly can be assembled by inserting the snap block into the snap slot.
  • the edge of the lens assembly (eg, the frame) may be made of magnetic material, and the adjusting member 150 may be provided with a magnetic member such as a magnet, so as to realize the assembly of the temple and the lens assembly through magnetic attraction.
  • the adjustment member 150 can be configured as a replaceable adjustment member 150 of different specifications, that is, a pair of glasses is configured with a plurality of adjustment members 150 of different specifications, wherein each adjustment member 150 can be configured by the above-mentioned embodiments Removable connection is achieved with the lens assembly, and the length of the temples can be adjusted by adjusting members 150 of different specifications to achieve the purpose of adjusting the distance between the acoustic output end 30 on the wearing member 100 and the ear or improving the wearing comfort of the user.
  • the horizontal distance between the acoustic output end 30 on the wearing member 100 and the user's tragus can be at an appropriate distance (eg, no more than 2cm, 2.5cm, 3cm, 3.5cm, etc.), thereby improving the user's the volume heard.
  • the adjustment member 150 may include a temple adjustment member with a length of L1, a temple adjustment member with a length of L2, and a temple adjustment member with a length of L3, wherein L1 ⁇ L2 ⁇ L3.
  • an adjustment member 150 with a length of L2 when an adjustment member 150 with a length of L2 is installed in the glasses, if the user feels that the temple legs are too long when wearing it, the adjustment member 150 with a length of L1 can be replaced. If the user feels that the temples are too short when wearing, they can be replaced with an adjustment member 150 with a length of L3.
  • adjusting members 150 are provided on the temples to realize detachable connection between the adjusting members 150 and the lens assembly, and the length of the temples can be adjusted by replacing the adjusting members with different specifications to adapt to different users, and improve user comfort.
  • the wearing member 100 may include detachably connected temple and adjustment members 150 .
  • the temple includes a connecting end 103 and an erecting end 102 which are arranged oppositely.
  • the connecting end 103 is detachably connected to the adjusting member 150 , that is, the adjusting member 150 is detachably connected to the connecting end 103 of the temple.
  • the erection end 102 erects the temple on the auricle.
  • the adjusting member 150 is replaceably connected to the temple, so as to adjust the length of the temple by replacing the adjusting member 150 with different specifications.
  • the adjustment member 150 can be configured as a replaceable adjustment member 150 of different specifications, that is, a pair of glasses is configured with a plurality of adjustment members 150 of different specifications, wherein each adjustment member 150 can be detachably connected to the temple. , and then the length of the temples can be adjusted by adjusting members 150 of different specifications.
  • the connecting end 103 of the temple is provided with a first buckle 110
  • the end of the adjusting member 150 connected to the temple is provided with a second buckle 154
  • the first buckle 110 and the second buckle 154 are provided.
  • the two buckles 154 cooperate to realize the detachable connection between the adjusting member 150 and the temple.
  • the first buckle 110 may be a convex block
  • the second buckle 154 may be a slot
  • the convex block is inserted into the slot to realize the connection between the adjusting member 150 and the temple.
  • the first buckle 110 may be a slot
  • the second buckle 154 may be a bump.
  • the first buckle 110 may be a hook structure
  • the second buckle 154 may also be a groove structure, and the hook is arranged in the groove to realize the connection between the adjusting member 150 and the temple.
  • the connection between the adjustment member 150 and the temple can be realized by means of magnetic attraction.
  • the connecting end 103 of the temple is provided with a magnetic member
  • the adjustment member 150 is made of a magnetic material
  • the connection between the adjustment member 150 and the temple is realized by magnetic attraction.
  • the connecting end 103 is provided with a magnetic member
  • the end of the adjusting member 150 connected to the temple is provided with a magnetic member, so as to realize the connection through the principle of attraction of opposites.
  • the adjusting member 150 is provided with a permanent magnet
  • the connecting end 103 of the temple is provided with an energized coil, and the energized coil is energized to generate a magnetic force to attract or repel the permanent magnet, so as to realize the assembly or disassembly of the adjustment member 150 and the temple.
  • the adjustment member 150 may be combined with the wearing member 100 of one or more of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the wearer 100 eg, temples
  • the concave section 20 makes the upper edge of the temple have a downward recess 22 on the temple.
  • the concave section 20 has an acoustic output end 30 therein.
  • the connecting section 10 may include a first connecting section 12 and a second connecting section 14 , and the concave section 20 is connected between the first connecting section 12 and the second connecting section 14 .
  • the first connecting section 12 is erected on the user's auricle, and the second connecting section 14 is connected to the adjusting member 150 .
  • the recessed section 20 may include an angled mounting portion 21 and a transition portion 23 .
  • the acoustic output end 30 is disposed on the mounting portion 21 or the transition portion 23 .
  • the transition portion 23 is connected between the mounting portion 21 and the first connecting segment 12, and the transition portion 23 is connected to the first connecting segment 12 by bending and extending downward, so as to extend to the tragus when worn, so as to be closer to the tragus.
  • the second connecting segment 14 is connected to one end of the mounting portion 21 , and one end of the second connecting segment 14 away from the mounting portion 21 is used for connecting with the adjusting member 150 .
  • the adjustment member 150 may include a peg.
  • the pile head can connect the temple of the glasses with the frame or the lens, so as to realize the rotation of the temple relative to the frame or the lens.
  • one end of the pile head can be fixedly connected with the frame or lens, and the other end of the pile head can be rotatably connected with the temple.
  • the other end of the pile head and the frame or lens can be connected by means of bonding, inlay, welding, riveting, screw connection, snap connection and the like.
  • the other end of the pile head and the temple can be connected by a hinge mechanism, so that the temple can be rotated relative to the pile head, so that the user can adjust the angle between the temple and the frame or the lens as required.
  • one end of the pile head can also be rotatably connected to the frame or lens, and the other end of the pile head can be fixedly connected to the temple, and such deformations are all within the protection scope of this specification.
  • the glasses are rimless glasses (that is, the glasses do not have a frame, and the temples are directly connected to the lens)
  • the head and/or lens can be replaced by replacing the head and/or the lens. to meet the needs of different users.
  • the width of the glasses can be adjusted by substituting lenses of different sizes.
  • the width of eyeglasses can refer to the distance between the two temples where the lens or frame joins.
  • the width of the glasses may include the sum of the width of the two lenses and the bridge distance between the two lenses. Therefore, by replacing lenses of different sizes, the glasses can have different widths to meet the needs of different users. For example, when the width of the user's head is large, the insufficient lens width may cause the user to experience too much pressure from the temples when wearing the glasses. Choosing a wider lens can increase the width of the glasses and reduce the impact of the temples on the user. Squeeze force of the head.
  • the insufficient lens width may cause the user's head and the glasses to be not firmly attached, so that the glasses are easy to fall off.
  • Choosing a lens with a smaller width can shorten the width of the glasses and improve the relationship between the user's head and the glasses. The fit of the glasses.
  • the overall dimensions of the glasses can be adjusted by substituting different sized pegs.
  • the dimensions of the pile head may refer to the length and width of the pile head.
  • the length of the pile head may refer to the dimension of the pile head along the length of the temple.
  • the width of the pile head may refer to the dimension of the pile head along the width direction of the lens.
  • the length of the glasses may include the size of the tip along the length of the temple and the sum of the length of the temple.
  • the length of the pegs affects the distance from the temple to the lens, which in turn affects the distance from the acoustic output 30 to the user's ear.
  • the distance from the acoustic output end 30 on the temple to the lens is related to the length of the head.
  • the longer the head length the further the acoustic output 30 is from the lens.
  • the shorter the length of the pile head the closer the distance from the acoustic output end 30 to the lens.
  • the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the lens may be relatively short.
  • the acoustic output end 30 is located in front of the user's ear, the distance between the two is relatively far.
  • the length of the pile head is too long, it may cause the acoustic output end 30 to be far away from the lens, so that the acoustic output end 30 is located behind or even far behind the user's ear, which may cause the acoustic output end 30 to transmit
  • the effect of the sound becomes worse, affecting the user experience.
  • the width of the pile head will affect the width of the glasses. Exemplarily, the larger the width of the pile head, the greater the distance between the two temples connected to the pile head, thereby increasing the width of the glasses. The smaller the width of the pile head, the shorter the distance between the corresponding two temple legs, and the smaller the width of the glasses.
  • the width of the glasses can be adjusted according to the head shape and head size of the wearer (ie, the user) by selecting a suitable lens or a suitable stud, so as to make the user more comfortable when wearing the glasses. For example, when the width of the user's head is relatively large, selecting a lens with a larger width and/or a stud head with a larger width can increase the width of the glasses and reduce the pressing force of the temple on the user's head.
  • a suitable pile head can be selected according to the user's head shape and head size to shorten the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the user's ear, so that when different users wear glasses, the acoustic output end 30 on the temples is the same.
  • the length of the glasses may be too long, which may cause the acoustic output end 30 to be located behind the user's ear and far away from the ear when the user wears the glasses, and the length of the glasses can be shortened by choosing a pin head with a smaller length , to reduce the squeezing force of the temples on the user's head.
  • the glasses may be half-rim glasses (ie, the edges of the lenses are at least partially surrounded by the frame) or full-rim glasses (ie, the edges of the lenses are completely surrounded by the frames). Since the connection between the pile head and the mirror frame is usually a fixed connection, it is difficult to remove the pile head and the mirror frame. Based on the above reasons, the structure of the temples can be improved, and then the size of the glasses can be adjusted by adjusting the temples.
  • the temples may include a first segment and a second segment connected to the first segment. One end of the first segment may be connected to the pile head, and the other end of the first segment may be connected to the second end.
  • the first section and the second section can perform operations such as relative rotation, expansion and contraction, and disassembly.
  • the first segment of the temple and the parts connected with the first segment such as the head, lens, temple, etc.
  • the relative rotation, retraction and disassembly of the first segment and the second segment adjust the size of the glasses. In some cases, when the width of the glasses is not suitable or the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the ear is too far, it can be adjusted by replacing the first section of the temple and the stud and the frame connected to the first section to Meet the needs of different users.
  • the first segment of the temple may correspond to the first leg 141 in the previous embodiment, and may be used for connection with a viewing element (eg, a frame).
  • the second segment of the temple can be equivalent to the second leg 143 in the previous embodiment, and can be used for connecting the mounting portion 21 .
  • the first section of the temple and the second section of the temple can specifically implement relative rotation, relative expansion and removal, and can refer to the description in FIG. 13 , and will not be repeated here.
  • the half-rim glasses and full-rim glasses listed in this embodiment are only examples, and are not limited to the types of glasses. Exemplarily, when the glasses are rimless glasses, the temples may also include the first segment and the second segment. , and the first segment can still be replaced with the pile head and the lens as a whole.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of the connection structure of the U-shaped member and the connecting rod according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the temples and the pile head may be connected by a U-shaped member 180 and a connecting rod 160 as shown in FIG. 28 .
  • the U-shaped member 180 may have a U-shaped notch 181 .
  • Three sets of first positioning through holes 183 (eg, 183-1, 183-2, 183-3) may be symmetrically provided on two side walls of the U-shaped recess 181, and the three sets of first positioning through holes 183 are arranged along the U-shaped recess.
  • the side walls of the port 181 are distributed in the longitudinal direction.
  • the first end of the connecting rod 160 is provided with three sets of second positioning through holes 163 (eg, 163 - 1 , 163 - 2 , 163 - 3 ), and the three sets of second positioning through holes are distributed along the length direction of the connecting rod 160 .
  • the second end of the connecting rod 160 may be connected to other components of the temple (eg, the first segment of the temple).
  • the first end of the connecting rod 160 can extend into the U-shaped notch 181 of the U-shaped member 180, and the positioning member 170 (for example, the positioning rod) and the first positioning through hole 183 and the second positioning through hole 163 cooperate with each other.
  • the connecting rod 160 is fixed with the U-shaped member 180 so as to fixedly connect the temple and the pile head.
  • the connecting rod 160 may be a component of the temple.
  • the connecting rod 160 may be connected to the first segment of the temple.
  • the U-shaped member 180 may be part of a stud head, which may also include components (eg, a hinge mechanism) not shown in FIG. 28 for connecting with a lens or frame.
  • the length of the glasses may refer to the sum of the length of the U-shaped member 180 and the length of the part of the temple that does not extend into the U-shaped notch 181 .
  • the length of the temple may include the sum of the lengths of the connecting rod 160 and other components of the temple (eg, the first and second segments of the temple). Therefore, as the length of the connecting rod 160 extending into the U-shaped notch 181 is different, the length of the glasses also changes. In FIG.
  • the connection between the connecting rod 160 and the U-shaped member 180 can be divided into three states, exemplarily: (1) When the length of the connecting rod 160 extending into the U-shaped notch 181 is the longest, the connecting rod 160 The three second positioning through holes (163-1, 163-2, 163-3) are respectively aligned with the first positioning through holes (183-1, 183-2, 183-3) and pass through three positioning members Fix them separately, and the length of the glasses is the shortest at this time. (2) When the length of the connecting rod 160 extending into the U-shaped recess 181 is the shortest, the second positioning through hole 163-3 on the connecting rod 160 is aligned with the first positioning through hole 183-1 and is fixed by a positioning member 170 , the length of the glasses is the longest.
  • a magnet is arranged on the side wall of the connecting rod 160 provided with the second positioning through hole 163
  • a magnet is arranged on the side wall of the U-shaped recess 181 , when the connecting rod 160 extends into the U-shaped recess 181 , the connecting rod 160
  • the magnet of the 181 and the magnet of the U-shaped notch 181 will attract each other, preventing the relative rotation of the connecting rod 160 and the U-shaped member 180 .
  • the structures of the connecting rod 160 and the U-shaped member 180 and their connection methods are only examples, and are not intended to limit their specific structures. Those skilled in the art can transform them to obtain the connecting rod 160 and the U-shaped member 180 with different structures. These embodiments are all within the protection scope of this specification.
  • the connecting rod 160 may be a part of the head and the U-shaped member 180 may be a part of the temple.
  • the number of the first positioning through holes 183 and the second positioning holes 163 may not be limited to three groups.
  • the number of the first positioning through holes 183 and the second positioning holes 163 may be two groups, four groups, Groups of five or more.
  • the length of the glasses can be adjusted by adjusting the length of the connecting rod 160 extending into the U-shaped notch 181 to adjust the distance between the acoustic output end 30 and the ear. For example, when the acoustic output end 30 is located behind the user's ear and is far away from the ear, it indicates that the length of the glasses is too long. At this time, the length of the connecting rod 160 extending into the U-shaped notch 181 can be increased to shorten the length of the glasses. . For another example, when the acoustic output end 30 is located in front of the user's ear and is far away from the ear, it indicates that the length of the glasses is too short. At this time, the length of the connecting rod 160 extending into the U-shaped notch 181 can be reduced to increase the size of the glasses. length.
  • the shape of the wearable device 1000 may be fixed, that is, the shape of the wearable device 1000 cannot be adjusted.
  • the relative position between the wearable member 100 and the visible member 200 cannot be changed, and ultimately the shape of the wearable device 1000 cannot be changed.
  • the visible part 200 can be integrally formed with the wearing part 100 , so that the connection relationship and relative position of the visible part 200 and the wearing part 100 are fixed, so the shape of the wearable device 1000 is also fixed.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the setting position of the relative position detection device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the shape of the wearable device 1000 is adjustable, that is, the shape of the wearable device 100 can be changed.
  • the glasses may exist in the form shown in FIG. 29 , and the angle formed between the temples and the frame of the glasses in this form is approximately equal to 90 degrees.
  • the glasses in this form can be directly worn by the user.
  • glasses can also exist in other forms.
  • the temple of the glasses is rotated toward the inner side (ie, toward the other temple) along the connection point between the temple and the frame, so that the angle between the temple and the frame is reduced. In this state, the glasses cannot be worn directly, but because the size of the glasses is smaller than other forms, they are more suitable for carrying and storage.
  • the wearing member 100 can move relative to the visual member 200 so that the user can adjust the shape of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the user can adjust the shape of the wearable device 1000 according to the usage scenario and purpose, thereby effectively improving the user experience.
  • the wearable device 1000 may include a connecting component for connecting the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200, and the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200 may be movably connected through the connecting component.
  • the connection assembly may include the adjustment member 150 of the previous examples, for example, the connection assembly may be a pile head. The wearing member 100 can be rotated relative to the visual member 200 through the pile head.
  • the user can adjust the shape of the wearable device according to actual needs. For example, when the user does not need to use the wearable device 1000, the wearable device 1000 can be stored. For another example, when the user needs to use the wearable device 1000, the wearable device 1000 needs to be adjusted to a usable state.
  • One or more functional elements on wearable device 1000 are powered by a power source.
  • one or more functional elements may be turned off or adjusted to a sleep state when not in use.
  • the speaker assembly can be turned off or paused to play music when the wearable device 1000 is not in use.
  • the power can be turned off or adjusted to a sleep state.
  • the user may control the operation of one or more functional elements by means of manual control.
  • the control circuit assembly may include structures such as buttons, touch pads, and the like disposed on the wearing member 100 and/or the visual member 200 .
  • a feedback signal is generated, and the control circuit assembly can control the acoustic element (eg, the speaker assembly) according to the feedback signal.
  • the buttons and the touchpad will generate different feedback signals according to the way the user touches and presses. For example, a user pressing a button once may generate a feedback signal corresponding to causing the speaker assembly to pause playing music.
  • the user taps the button twice to generate a feedback signal corresponding to causing the speaker assembly to switch to the next piece of music.
  • the user draws a circle on the touchpad to generate a feedback signal corresponding to stopping the operation of the speaker assembly.
  • the feedback signal type corresponding to the user's operation can be set according to actual needs.
  • one or more functional elements may be turned off, suspended or adjusted to other states with lower power consumption, so as to save power consumption and improve standby time.
  • one or more functional elements can be adjusted first, and then the shape of the wearable device 1000 can be adjusted. For example, the speaker assembly is turned off first, the power is turned off, and then the relative position between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200 is adjusted so as to be folded relatively to facilitate carrying or storage.
  • controlling the operation of the speaker assembly based on the user's manual control may cause the user to forget to pause and turn off the functional element when the wearable device 1000 is not in use. For example, the user just adjusts the relative position between the wearing part 100 and the visual part 200 so that they are folded relative to each other, but does not turn off the speaker assembly and the power supply. The speaker assembly will continue to consume power when working, which causes the power supply to continuously deliver power to the speaker assembly, which increases the power consumption of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the wearable device 1000 provided in this specification further includes a detection component.
  • the detection assembly may be in communication/connectivity with one or more functional elements in one or more of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the detection component can be used to detect the form of the wearable device 1000
  • the processor can determine the use state of the wearable device 1000 according to the form of the wearable device 1000
  • the control circuit component can be based on the use state of the wearable device 1000 Control one or more other functional elements.
  • the detection component can be used to detect the positional relationship between the wearable member 100 and the visual member 200, and the shape of the wearable device 1000 can be determined based on the positional relationship.
  • the detection assembly will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 29 .
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the setting position of the relative position detection device shown in some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the detection assembly may include a relative position detection device (not shown in the figure), and the relative position detection device may be used to detect the position of the wearing member 100 relative to the visible member 200 , wherein, The relative position detection device may be provided at the connection between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200, that is, the position A shown in FIG. 29 .
  • the wearable device 1000 when the wearable member 100 is in the first position relative to the viewable member 200, the wearable device 1000 may be said to be in a folded state. When the wearable member 100 is in the second position relative to the visible member 200, the wearable device 1000 may be said to be in an open state. When the wearable member 100 is in a transitional position relative to the viewable member 200, the wearable device 1000 may be referred to as a transitional state.
  • the folded state may refer to the shape of the wearable device 1000 when the angle between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200 is smaller than the first angle threshold.
  • the first angle threshold may be in the range of 10 degrees to 45 degrees. In some embodiments, the first angle threshold may be in the range of 10 degrees to 30 degrees. In some embodiments, the first angle threshold may be in the range of 10 degrees to 15 degrees.
  • the open state can be understood as the form of the wearable device 1000 when the angle between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200 is greater than the second angle threshold, and in this form, the user can wear the wearable device 1000 .
  • the second angle threshold may be in the range of 75-120 degrees. In some embodiments, the second angle threshold may be in the range of 75-100 degrees. In some embodiments, the second angle threshold may be in the range of 75-90 degrees.
  • the transition state can be understood as a state of the wearable device 1000 when the included angle between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200 is greater than the first angle threshold and less than the second angle threshold.
  • a transition state when the wearable device 1000 is not in the folded state and not in the unfolded state, it may be referred to as a transition state.
  • the wearable device 1000 When the wearable device 1000 is in a folded state or a transition state, it may be considered that the user is not currently using the wearable device 1000 .
  • the user can adjust the position of the wearing member 100 relative to the visual member 200 according to his needs, thereby changing the shape of the wearing member 100 .
  • the wearing member 100 can be adjusted to the second position, so that the wearing member 100 is in an open state.
  • the wearing member 100 may be adjusted to the first position, so that the wearing member 100 is in a folded state.
  • the relative position detection device may include a spring-loaded probe and a conductive metal member disposed at the connection between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200 .
  • the spring-loaded probe and the conductive metal member may be disposed at the connection between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200, respectively.
  • the spring-loaded probe may be disposed on the edge of the wearing member 100 near the connection between the wearing member 100 and the visual member 200
  • the conductive metal part may be disposed on the visual member 200 near the visual member 200 and the wearing member 200 .
  • the state of the wearable device 1000 can be determined by detecting the conduction state between the spring-type probe and the conductive metal component.
  • the wearing member 100 when it is detected that the spring-loaded probe is in a non-conducting state, that is, the spring-loaded probe is disconnected from the conductive metal part, it can be determined that the wearing member 100 is in the first position or the transition position relative to the visible member 200; When it is detected that the spring-loaded probe is in a conducting state, that is, the spring-loaded probe is electrically connected to the conductive metal part, it can be determined that the wearing member 100 is in the second position relative to the visible member 200 .
  • the relative position detection device may include a switch structure.
  • the state of the switch structure When the position of the wearing member 100 relative to the visible member 200 changes, the state of the switch structure will be affected. position, and then determine the state of the wearable device 1000.
  • the switch structure when it is detected that the switch structure is in a closed state, that is, a conductive state, it can be determined that the wearable device 1000 is in an open state; when it is detected that the switch structure is in an open state, that is, a non-conducting state, it can be determined that the wearable device 1000 is in an open state;
  • the wearable device 1000 is in a folded state or a transition state.
  • the micro switch is set at A in FIG. 29 .
  • the micro switch may include a transmission element (not shown in the figure) and an action reed (not shown in the figure) connected with the transmission element.
  • the wearable device 1000 When the wearable device 1000 is in the open state, the wearing member 100 is in the second position, At this time, the wearing part 100 or the visual part 200 will press the transmission element, and the transmission element will act on the action reed, causing the contact of the action reed to be turned on, so that the micro switch is in a conducting state; when the wearable device 1000 In the transition state or the folded state, the wearing member 100 is in the transition position or the first position, and the force acting on the action reed is not enough to cause the contact of the action reed to be turned on, so the micro switch is in a non-conductive state.
  • the types of switch structures may include, but are not limited to, micro switches, photoelectric switches, proximity switches.
  • the relative position detection device may include a magnet, a magnetic conductor, and a magnetic field detector.
  • the magnet can be coupled with the magnet conducting body.
  • the magnetic field detector can be used to detect the strength of the magnetic field between the magnet and the magnetic conductor.
  • the position of the wearable member 100 relative to the visible member 200 may be determined according to the result of the detected magnetic field strength, thereby determining the state of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the magnet and the magnetic conductor may be disposed on the wearing part 100 and the visible part 200 respectively. When the relative position of the visible part 200 and the wearing part 100 changes, the relative position between the magnet and the magnetic conductor will also change.
  • the magnetic field detector can detect the change of the magnetic field strength, and based on the change of the magnetic field strength, the position of the wearing part 100 relative to the visible part 200 can be determined, Then, the state of the wearable device 1000 is determined.
  • the magnetic field strength between the magnet and the magnetic conductor exceeds a set magnetic field strength threshold, it may be determined that the wearing member 100 is in the second position relative to the visible member 200; when the magnetic field strength between the magnet and the magnetic conductor When the set magnetic field strength threshold is not exceeded, it may be determined that the wearing member 100 is in the first position or the transition position relative to the visual member 200 .
  • the magnetic conductor may include iron, nickel, cobalt, and the like.
  • the wearable device 1000 may further include a time detection device, and the time detection device may be used to detect the duration that the wearing member 100 is in the second position relative to the visual member 200 .
  • the user's misoperation or unexpected situation may cause the position of the wearing member 100 to change relative to the visible member 200 , for example, the user accidentally adjusts the position of the wearing member 100 .
  • the control circuit component will also determine that the wearable device 1000 is in use, and then control the corresponding components to start working (for example, control the speaker component to play music). Therefore, in some embodiments, it can be determined that the wearable device 1000 is in the open state only when it is detected that the wearable member 100 is in the second position and exceeds a certain period of time.
  • the wearable device 1000 may be determined to be in a non-use state when it is detected that the duration of electrical connection between the spring-loaded probe and the conductive metal component exceeds a preset time threshold. When it is detected that the duration of the electrical connection between the spring-type probe and the conductive metal part does not exceed a preset time threshold, it can be determined that the wearable device 1000 is in a use state.
  • the preset time threshold may be 0.5 seconds to 8 seconds. In some embodiments, the preset time threshold may be 2 seconds to 6 seconds. In some embodiments, the preset time threshold may be 3 seconds to 5 seconds.
  • corresponding operations may be performed based on the use state of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the control circuit component can turn off the power to save power and improve the battery life of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the control circuit component can control the power supply to supply power to the speaker component, and control the speaker component to play a sound signal.
  • the above description about the detection component is only for illustration and description, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the detection assembly under the guidance of this specification.
  • these corrections and changes are still within the scope of this specification.
  • the relative position detection device and the time detection device can be combined into one device, so that it has both the time detection function and the position detection function.
  • the time detection device may be omitted.
  • the user may perform operations such as replacement, maintenance, etc. on some parts of the wearable device 1000 .
  • This process involves disassembly and assembly of the components of the wearable device 1000 (eg, the wearing part 100 and the visible part 200 ).
  • the connection structure between the components of the wearable device 1000 will affect the difficulty of disassembly and assembly.
  • the wearable device 1000 is glasses, the frame and the temple are usually connected through a connection structure (eg, a pile head) that is difficult to disassemble. It is time-consuming and laborious to disassemble or assemble, and it is difficult for users to replace and repair by themselves.
  • the temples and frames thereof may also be provided with various functional elements. If the smart glasses are replaced as a whole, it will cost a lot. However, the connection structure thereof makes local replacement (eg, replacement of temples) difficult, which reduces the user experience to a certain extent.
  • the present specification provides a wearable device 1000 including a quick-release assembly, wherein the visual component 200 and the wearing component 100 are connected through the quick-release component, and the quick-release component can simplify the connection between the visual component 200 and the wearing component 100
  • the installation and disassembly steps of the device reduce the difficulty of replacing and repairing partial parts of the wearable device 1000 by the user, and improve the user experience.
  • the quick release assembly will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 37 .
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of a wearable device provided according to some embodiments of the present specification
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the wearable device shown in FIG. 30
  • FIG. 32 is an axial side structure of a mounting seat in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31
  • Schematic diagram FIG. 33 is a schematic cross-sectional structural diagram of the first locking member, the first elastic member, the first positioning cover and the key plate in the quick release assembly shown in FIG. 31
  • the wearable device 1000 may include a visual element 200 , a quick release assembly 900 and a wearing element 100 .
  • the visual element 200 and the wearing element 100 are respectively connected to two ends of the quick release assembly 900 .
  • the steps required to disassemble the visual element 200 or the wearing element 100 from the quick release assembly 900 or to assemble the visual element 200 or the wearing element 100 are simpler, more convenient and less difficult. , which can effectively improve the user experience.
  • the wearing member 100 is a temple
  • the wearable device 1000 includes a visual member 200 , two sets of quick-release components 900 and two sets of wearing components 100 , and the two sets of quick-release components 900 are disposed on the visual component 200 .
  • the two sets of wearing parts 100 are respectively connected with a corresponding set of quick-release components 900 to form the glasses-like structure as shown in FIG. 30 .
  • the quick release assembly 900, the visual element 200, and the wearing element 100 may all be independent components.
  • the quick release assembly 900 , the visual element 200 and the wearing element 100 can be assembled or disassembled from each other.
  • both the visual element 200 and the wearing element 100 can be quickly detached from the quick release assembly 900 .
  • the quick release assembly 900 can be fixedly connected with one of the visual element 200 or the wearing element 100, and can be detachably connected with the other.
  • the wearing piece 100 and the quick-release assembly 900 can be set in a conventional connection structure or an integrated structure, and thus cannot be quickly disassembled.
  • the quick release assembly 900 may include a mounting seat 921 and a first locking member 922 .
  • One end of the mounting seat 921 is provided with an insertion cavity 9213, and the opening direction of the insertion cavity 9213 faces the side wall 9216 of the mounting seat.
  • the mounting seat 921 is also provided with a through hole 9211 , and the through hole 9211 penetrates the side wall 9217 of the insertion cavity 9213 along the thickness direction of the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the first locking member 922 may be disposed on the mounting seat 921 and pass through the insertion cavity 9213 through the through hole 9211 .
  • the first locking member 922 includes a first locking portion 9221 and a first unlocking portion 9223 that are coaxially arranged.
  • the projection of the first unlocking portion 9223 in the axial direction is located within the projection range of the first locking portion 9221 in the axial direction, that is, the cross-sectional area of the first unlocking portion 9223 perpendicular to the axial direction is smaller than that of the first locking portion 9221 perpendicular to the axial direction. vertical cross-sectional area.
  • the first locking portion 9221 is used to limit and fix the visual element 200 .
  • the first unlocking portion 9223 is used to release the restriction on the visual element 200 .
  • the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 are coaxially disposed, which means that the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 are connected end-to-end and extend in the same direction.
  • the lower end of the first locking portion 9221 is connected to the upper end of the first unlocking portion 9223 and the central axes of the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 coincide.
  • the central axes of the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 may only be parallel but not coincident.
  • the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 are shaft segments with different shaft diameters, and the shaft diameter of the first locking portion 9221 is larger than the shaft diameter of the first unlocking portion 9223 . Since the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 are coaxially disposed, the cross-sectional area of the first unlocking portion 9223 perpendicular to the axial direction is smaller than the cross-sectional area of the first locking portion 9221 perpendicular to the axial direction.
  • first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 may be rods or cylinders, and their cross-sections perpendicular to the axial direction may be in regular or irregular shapes such as rectangles, triangles, or polygons.
  • the wearing member 100 can be fixedly connected with the mounting base 921 and detachably connected with the visual member 200 through the mounting base 921 .
  • the visual element 200 may be provided with a docking portion.
  • the abutting portion can extend from the opening of the insertion cavity 9213 into the insertion cavity 9213 to be mated with the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the first locking member 922 may be disposed on the mounting seat 921 and pass through the insertion cavity 9213 . Wherein, when the first locking portion 9221 is located in the insertion cavity 9213, the visual element 200 can be limited and fixed. When the first unlocking portion 9223 is located in the insertion cavity 9213 , the restriction on the viewing element 200 can be released, and the viewing element 200 can be removed from the mounting seat 921 .
  • the viewing element 200 is provided with a locking hole 212 and a passageway 214 communicating with the locking hole 212 .
  • the diameter of the locking hole 212 is larger than the width of the passageway 214 .
  • the width of the passage 214 is between the shaft diameter of the first locking portion 9221 and the shaft diameter of the first unlocking portion 9223 so that the first unlocking portion 9223 can enter the locking hole 212 through the passage 214, while the first locking portion 9221 cannot Via aisle 214. Therefore, when the first locking portion 9221 is located in the locking hole 212, the visual element 200 and the insertion cavity 9213 can be kept relatively fixed.
  • the passing here may mean that the first unlocking part 9223 can be embedded in the aisle 214 and move in the aisle 214 .
  • the locking hole 212 may be provided on the edge of the visual element 200 such that the locking hole 212 has an opening.
  • the width of the opening is smaller than the diameter of the locking hole 212 .
  • the width of the opening is between the shaft diameter of the first locking portion 9221 and the shaft diameter of the first unlocking portion 9223 so that the first unlocking portion 9223 can enter the locking hole 212 through the opening, while the first locking portion 9221 cannot pass through the opening .
  • the visible part 200 and the quick release assembly 900 insert the first locking member 922 through the through hole 9211 and adjust the first locking member 922 so that the first unlocking part 9223 is located in the insertion cavity 9213, and then the visible
  • the abutting portion of the member 200 ie, the portion provided with the locking hole 212 and the passage 214 ) protrudes into the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the insertion cavity 9213 can prevent the sight member 200 from swinging relative to the mounting seat 921 so as to align the passage 214 with the first unlocking portion 9223 .
  • the first locking member 922 is adjusted so that the first unlocking portion 9223 enters the locking hole 212 through the passage 214 . Then the first locking member 922 is adjusted relative to the mounting seat 921 again (eg, pushing the first locking member 922 to move along the axis direction of the first locking member 922 ), so that the first locking portion 9221 is located in the insertion cavity 9213 . Since the first locking portion 9221 cannot pass through the aisle 214 , the first locking portion 9221 can be assembled with the locking hole 212 to limit and fix the viewing element 200 , and then fix the viewing element 200 to the mounting seat 921 .
  • the first locking element 922 can be adjusted so that the first unlocking portion 9223 replaces the position of the first locking portion 9221 and is located in the locking hole 212 and is opposite to the insertion cavity 9213
  • the sight piece 200 is pulled so that the first unlocking portion 9223 passes through the aisle 214 relatively and is disengaged from the locking hole 212 , so that the sight piece 200 is detached from the mounting seat 921 .
  • the first locking member 922 By disposing an insertion cavity 9213 at one end of the mounting seat 921 , the first locking member 922 is disposed on the mounting seat 921 and passes through the insertion cavity 9213 . At the same time, the first locking member 922 is configured to be adjustable in position relative to its axial direction, and then one of the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 can be adjusted to be located in the insertion cavity 9213, so that the first locking portion The portion 9221 or the first unlocking portion 9223 is fitted with the locking hole 212 on the sight piece 200 .
  • the first locking portion 9221 is restricted by the passage 214 so as to lock the visual element 200 inserted in the insertion cavity 9213 or release the locking state of the visual element 200 through the first unlocking portion 9223, so that the visual element 200 and the visual element 200 can be improved. Disassembly efficiency between mounts 921.
  • the position of the first locking member 922 can be adjusted by means including pressing, rotating, pushing and pulling, so that the first unlocking part 9223 and the first locking part 9221 can be alternately located in the insertion cavity 9213, so as to facilitate Disassembly and assembly between the visual element 200 and the mounting base 921 .
  • the quick release assembly 900 may further include a first elastic member 923 .
  • the first elastic member 923 can be disposed on the mounting seat 921 and elastically abut against the first locking portion 9221.
  • the first elastic member 923 can be used to provide a first elastic force so that the first locking portion 9221 is located in the position when no external force acts. Insert into cavity 9213.
  • the first locking element 922 when the user wants to remove the visual element 200 from the mounting base 921 or install the visual element 200, the first locking element 922 needs to be adjusted first so that the first unlocking portion 9223 is located in the insertion cavity 9213, During this process, the first locking member 922 will compress the first elastic member 923, so that the first elastic member 923 generates a first elastic force.
  • the application of external force can be stopped.
  • the first elastic force provided by the first elastic member 923 can push the first locking portion 9221 to move into the insertion cavity 9213 or make the first locking portion 9221 move into the locking hole 212 to fix the visual member 200 .
  • the first elastic member 923 may include a compression spring, an elastic column or a spring washer or the like. It can be deformed by external force, and will return to its original state after the external force is removed. By arranging the first elastic member 923 so as to maintain the first locking portion 9221 in the insertion cavity 9213 without external force interference, and can rebound after the external force is removed so that the first locking portion 9221 is positioned in the insertion cavity 9213, the fixation is improved. The reliability of the visual element 200 improves the user's operational convenience and is more user-friendly.
  • the first elastic member 923 may be disposed in the mounting seat 921 and elastically abut against an end of the first locking portion 9221 away from the first unlocking portion 9223 .
  • the user can press the first locking member 922 , and at this time, the first locking member 922 will move upward and compress the first elastic member 923 .
  • the first unlocking portion 9223 is located in the insertion cavity 9213 instead of the first locking portion 9221 , the fixing of the first locking member 922 to the visual member 200 is released.
  • the first elastic member 923 will push the first locking member 922 to reset (ie, move downward) until the first locking portion 9221 moves back into the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the through holes 9211 in the previous embodiments can be replaced with blind holes.
  • the open end of the blind hole can be located on one side wall 9217 of the insertion cavity 9213
  • the bottom end of the blind hole can be located on the other side wall 9217 of the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the first elastic member 923 can be disposed in the blind hole of the mounting seat 921 and elastically abut against an end of the first locking portion 9221 away from the first unlocking portion 9223 .
  • the first locking member 922 When the user presses the first locking member 922 , the first locking member 922 will move toward the bottom of the blind hole and compress the first elastic member 923 until the first unlocking portion 9223 replaces the first locking portion 9221 in the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the elastic force of the first elastic member 923 will push the first locking member 922 to move away from the bottom of the blind hole until the first locking portion 9221 moves into the insertion cavity 9213 again.
  • the first locking portion 9221 is also connected to the side wall of the blind hole in a limiting manner.
  • the first locking member 922 can slide back and forth along the inner wall of the blind hole, and then the first locking portion 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 can be adjusted to be alternately located in the insertion cavity 9213 to be assembled with the locking hole 212 .
  • the first locking member 922 can be limitedly matched with a limit ring provided on the side wall of the blind hole. It should be noted that, one or more embodiments of the present specification are for illustrative purposes only, and are not intended to limit the manner of mating between the first locking member 922 and the mounting seat 921 .
  • the through holes 9211 can also be connected to the first locking member 922 in a limited position.
  • at least two limiting structures eg, limiting rings
  • the first locking member 922 may It is arranged between the two limit structures and slides back and forth between the two limit structures.
  • the quick release assembly 900 may further include a first positioning cover 924 , the first positioning cover 924 is disposed on the mounting seat 921 , and the first elastic member 923 can be elastically compressed and disposed at the first positioning between the cover 924 and the first locking portion 9221 .
  • the mounting seat 921 is provided with a through hole 9211, and the first positioning cover 924 can be disposed in the through hole 9211, for example, through interference fitting, screwing or bonding with the through hole, etc.
  • Hole 9211 is connected.
  • the first locking member 922 can be connected with the first positioning cover 924 in a sliding limit.
  • the through hole can also be replaced with a blind hole, and the first positioning cover 924 can also be disposed in the blind hole.
  • the first positioning cover 924 may include a cylindrical body 9241 , a bottom wall 9243 disposed at one end of the cylindrical body 9241 , and a retaining ring 9245 disposed at the other end of the cylindrical body 9241 .
  • An end of the first locking portion 9221 away from the first unlocking portion 9223 is provided with an undercut 9225 .
  • the first elastic member 923 is disposed between the bottom wall 9243 and the first locking portion 9221 .
  • the first locking portion 9221 and the cylindrical body 9241 are slidably arranged, and the first locking member 922 is restricted from being separated from the first positioning cover 924 by the engagement of the undercut 9225 with the blocking ring 9245 .
  • the end of the first locking portion 9221 may have the entire undercut 9225 in the form of a loop.
  • the number of the undercuts 9225 may be multiple, such as three, four or five, and the multiple undercuts 9225 are arranged around the end of the first locking portion 9221 .
  • the undercut 9225 may be provided with a guide surface, so that the undercut 9225 can be inserted into the cylindrical body 9241 through the blocking ring 9245 and form a stop fit with the blocking ring 9245 .
  • the first positioning cover 924 may be a flat cover.
  • the retaining ring 9245 can be disposed on the side wall of the through hole 9211 on the mounting seat 921 .
  • the first locking member 922 passes through the blocking ring 9245 from one end of the through hole 9211.
  • the inverted buckle 9225 of the first locking member 922 can stop and cooperate with the blocking ring 9245.
  • the first positioning cover 924 then covers the through hole 9211.
  • the elastic member 923 is located in the through hole 9211 , and the first elastic member 923 is elastically compressed between the flat cover and the first locking portion 9221 .
  • a first locking member 922 , a first elastic member 923 and a first positioning cover 924 can be combined into an aggregate, and when the number of aggregates is one, the first locking member of the aggregate is constituted One end of the 922 itself can be used as a key, and there is no need to set the key board 925 separately.
  • the quick release assembly 900 may include two assemblies consisting of a first locking member 922 , a first elastic member 923 and a first positioning cover 924 .
  • the quick release assembly 900 may also include a key plate 925 .
  • the two aggregates can be connected through the keypad 925 .
  • one end of the first unlocking portion 9223 of each assembly away from the first locking portion 9221 is connected to the key plate 925, and the first locking member 922 of each assembly can be simultaneously contacted by pressing the key plate 925 for visibility.
  • the locking of the piece 200 improves the unlocking efficiency.
  • the number of aggregates may not be limited to one or two, but may also be three, four or more.
  • the position of the first locking member 922 can be adjusted by rotation.
  • the first locking member 922 is provided with a thread
  • the mounting seat 921 is provided with a threaded hole
  • the first locking member 922 is threadedly connected with the threaded hole.
  • a locking portion 9221 or a first unlocking portion 9223 is located in the insertion cavity 9213 .
  • the wearer 100 may or may not be rotatable relative to the mount 921 .
  • the wearing member 100 may be fixedly connected by welding or bonding, or the wearing member 100 and the mounting seat 921 may be in an integral structure, such as integral injection molding or integral casting, so that the mounting seat 921 can be considered as a wearing member part of 100.
  • the wearing member 100 and the mounting base 921 are detachably connected, which can facilitate the replacement of the wearing member 100 or the mounting base 921 with different lengths, so as to better meet the needs of the user.
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of the first embodiment of the connection between the mounting base and the wearing piece in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31 .
  • the other end of the mounting seat 921 is provided with an insertion slot 9212 .
  • An insertion portion 932 is provided at one end of the wearing piece 100 .
  • the insertion portion 932 is detachably connected to the insertion groove 9212 .
  • the wearing member 100 can be rotated relative to the mount 921 such that the wearing member 100 can be rotated towards the viewable member 200 (eg, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 30 , each wearing member 100 can be turned towards the other The direction of the wearing member 100 is rotated relative to the visual member 200 ) to be folded on one side of the visual member 200 , so as to facilitate the collection and storage of the wearable device 1000 .
  • the quick release assembly 900 may further include a second locking member 926 , a second elastic member 927 and a second positioning cover 928 .
  • the structure of the second locking member 926 may be the same as or similar to that of the first locking member 922
  • the second elastic member 927 may be the same or similar to that of the first elastic member 923
  • the second positioning cover 928 may be similar to the structure of the first positioning cover 924 same or similar.
  • the second locking member 926 may include a second locking portion 9261 and a second unlocking portion 9263 that are coaxially disposed.
  • the second positioning cover 928 is disposed on the mounting seat 921 .
  • the second locking member 926 and the second positioning cover 928 are slidably disposed, and the second locking member 926 passes through the insertion slot 9212, and the second elastic member 927 is elastically compressed and disposed between the second positioning cover 928 and the second locking member 926;
  • the inserting portion 932 is provided with a rotating hole 9320 and a channel 9322 communicating with the rotating hole 9320.
  • the inserting portion 932 is disposed in the inserting slot 9212, the second locking portion 9261 is located in the rotating hole 9320, and the second locking portion 9261 rotates with the rotating hole 9320.
  • one end of the second locking member 926 can be pressed, so that the second unlocking portion 9263 moves along its axis direction to replace the position of the second locking portion 9261 and is located in the rotation hole 9320, And separated from the rotating hole 9320 through the channel 9322.
  • the second elastic member 927 is compressed to generate a second elastic force.
  • the wearing member 100 when the user needs to install the wearing member 100 , he can press one end of the second locking member 926 first, so that the second unlocking part 9263 moves along its axis to replace the position of the second locking part 9261 and locate in the rotation hole 9320 . Then, the second unlocking part 9263 is controlled to enter the rotation hole 9320 through the channel 9322 . Finally, stop pressing the second locking member 926 , and the second elastic force generated by the second elastic member 927 can make the second locking portion return to the rotation hole 9320 to fix the rotation hole 9320 . Through the mutual cooperation between the second locking member 926 , the second elastic member 927 and the second positioning cover 928 , the wearing member 100 can be quickly and easily detached from the mounting seat 921 .
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic structural diagram of the second embodiment of the connection between the mounting base and the wearing piece in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31
  • FIG. 36 is a structural schematic diagram from another perspective of the connecting structure of the mounting base and the wearing piece shown in FIG. 35 .
  • the insertion portion 932 includes two extending sub-portions 9324 that are spaced apart. The opposite sides of the two extending sub-portions 9324 are provided with locking protrusions 9325 .
  • the side wall of the insertion slot 9212 is further provided with two snap grooves 9214 which are matched with the two snap projections 9325 .
  • the two extension sub-portions 9324 may be spaced apart, with a spaced cavity therebetween, so that when the two snap protrusions 9325 are assembled with the two snap grooves 9214, the two snap protrusions 9325 Pressing against the side wall of the insertion slot 9212 makes the two extending sub-portions 9324 approach each other, so that the snap-on protrusions 9325 can enter the insert slot 9212 and engage with the corresponding snap-fit slots 9214 .
  • the two extending sub-portions 9324 can be restored to their original state, so that the connection between the buckling protrusions 9325 and the buckling grooves 9214 is more reliable.
  • the locking protrusion 9325 can be driven to rotate in the locking groove 9214 , so that the angle of the wearing member 100 relative to the mounting base 921 can be adjusted.
  • the side wall of the insertion slot 9212 may further be provided with a guide slot 9215 leading to the buckle slot 9214, and the guide slot 9215 can guide the buckle protrusion 9325 to enter the buckle slot 9214 quickly and accurately, thereby improving the disassembly process. Loading efficiency.
  • the distance between the groove bottoms of the two guide grooves 9215 may be smaller than the distance between the opposite ends of the two snap protrusions 9325, so as to reduce the impact of the guide grooves 9215 on the two extension sub-portions 9324 The degree of extrusion deformation makes it easier to install the buckle protrusions 9325 in the buckle grooves 9214 .
  • the distance between the groove bottoms of the two snap grooves 9214 can be greater than the distance between the opposite ends of the two snap protrusions 9325, so as to release the snap grooves 9214 from pressing the snap protrusions 9325, so as to facilitate the two
  • the extension sub-portions 9324 are restored to the original shape, thereby improving the connection firmness of the insertion portion 932 and the insertion groove 9212 .
  • the buckle protrusion 9325 can be hemispherical, so as to facilitate the rotation between the wearing piece 100 and the mounting seat 921 .
  • the locking protrusion 9325 may also be cylindrical, prismatic, etc., which is not limited in this specification.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic structural diagram of a third embodiment in which the mounting base is connected to the wearing piece in the wearable device shown in FIG. 31 .
  • the insertion portion 932 may be provided with a rotation hole 9320 .
  • Quick release assembly 900 also includes fasteners 929 .
  • the mounting seat 921 is provided with a mounting hole 9290 for assembling with the fastener 929 .
  • the fastener 929 can be fixed to the mounting hole 9290 and pass through the rotating hole 9320 to be rotatably matched with the rotating hole 9320 .
  • the fasteners 929 may be screws, studs or pins, etc., which are not specifically limited in this specification.
  • this specification discloses a wearable device 1000 .
  • the first locking member 922 is disposed on the mounting seat 921 and passes through the insertion cavity 9213, and the position of the first locking member 922 can be adjusted, so that the first locking portion can be adjusted by adjusting the position of the first locking member 922.
  • One of the 9221 and the first unlocking portion 9223 is located in the insertion cavity 9213, so that the first locking portion 9221 or the first unlocking portion 9223 is adjusted to fit with the locking hole 212 on the visual element 200, so as to facilitate the locking and inserting into the insertion cavity 9223.
  • the viewing member 200 of the cavity 9213 may release the locked state of the viewing member 200, so that the disassembly efficiency between the viewing member 200 and the mounting seat 921 can be improved.
  • the above description about the quick release assembly 900 is only for illustration and description, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the mounting seat 921 under the guidance of this specification.
  • these corrections and changes are still within the scope of this specification.
  • the mounting base 921 and the wearing member 100 can be combined into one assembly, so that it has the function of the wearing member 100 and the function of being able to be quickly disassembled and assembled with the visual member 200 at the same time.
  • the mounting base 921 can be fixedly connected with the visual element 200, and the wearing element 100 can be quickly disassembled and assembled with the mounting base 921 through the first locking member 922, the first positioning cover 924, the first elastic member 923 and other components.
  • Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this specification.
  • numbers describing the quantity of components and properties are used, it should be understood that such numbers used to describe the embodiments, in some instances, the modifiers "about”, “approximately” or “substantially” etc. are used to modify. Unless stated otherwise, “about”, “approximately” or “substantially” means that a variation of ⁇ 20% is allowed for the stated number. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical data used in the specification and claims are approximations that may vary depending upon the desired characteristics of individual embodiments. In some embodiments, the numerical data should take into account the specified significant digits and use a general digit retention method. Notwithstanding that the numerical fields and data used in some embodiments of this specification to confirm the breadth of their ranges are approximations, in specific embodiments such numerical values are set as precisely as practicable.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Otolaryngology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Eyeglasses (AREA)
  • Details Of Audible-Bandwidth Transducers (AREA)
  • Obtaining Desirable Characteristics In Audible-Bandwidth Transducers (AREA)

Abstract

一种可穿戴设备（1000）包括佩戴件（100）和可视件（200）。佩戴件（100）包括连接段（10）和下凹段（20），下凹段（20）与连接段（10）连接，其中下凹段（20）使佩戴件（100）的上边沿在佩戴件（100）有向下的凹陷（22），下凹段（20）内具有声学输出端（30），下凹段（20）使声学输出端（30）位于用户耳部前方或附近。可穿戴设备（1000）能够更加便利地向用户传递声音信号。

Description

一种可穿戴设备
优先权信息
本申请要求2020年11月26日提交的申请号为202022811724.8的中国申请，2020年11月26日提交的申请号202011350077.3的中国申请，2021年05月19日提交的申请号为202121079519.5的中国申请，2021年05月19日提交的申请号为202110545559.2的中国申请，2021年03月26日提交的申请号为202120623637.1的中国申请，2021年02月01日提交的申请号为202120288727.X的中国申请，其全部内容通过引用并入本文。
技术领域
本说明书涉及声学领域，特别涉及一种可穿戴设备。
背景技术
随着科技发展，可穿戴的移动设备具有便于随身携带的特点，受到了许多用户的欢迎。特别的，可穿戴设备可以具备音频功能，通过设置在其上的扬声器组件实现音频的输出，提高输出的声音信号的质量就可以有效提高用户体验。
本说明书提供一种可穿戴设备，能够更加便利地向用户传递声音信号。
发明内容
本说明书实施例提供一种可穿戴设备，包括：佩戴件，所述佩戴件包括：连接段和下凹段，所述下凹段与所述连接段连接；其中，所述下凹段使所述佩戴件上边沿在所述佩戴件有向下的凹陷；所述下凹段内具有声学输出端。
在一些实施例中，所述下凹段被配置为当用户佩戴所述佩戴件时，使所述下凹段靠近所述用户耳部，所述下凹段使所述声学输出端位于用户耳部前方或附近。
在一些实施例中，所述下凹段包括呈角度连接的安装部和过渡部，所述声学输出端设置于所述安装部或所述过渡部，所述过渡部和所述安装部中的至少一个与所述连接段弯折连接并向下延伸。
在一些实施例中，所述过渡部和所述安装部之间形成的夹角的角度在30度～90度范围内。
在一些实施例中，所述连接段包括第一连接段，所述过渡部连接于所述安装部和所述第一连接段之间，且所述过渡部与所述第一连接段弯折连接并向下延伸。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述连接段还包括第二连接段，所述第二连接段与所述安装部的一端连接，所述第二连接段远离所述安装部的一端与所述可视件连接。
在一些实施例中，所述第二连接段包括第一腿部、第二腿部和调节部，所述第一腿部和所述第二腿部通过所述调节部连接，且所述第一腿部和所述第二腿部通过所述调节部可进行包括相对拉伸和/或旋转的操作，所述第二腿部连接所述安装部。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括功能元件，所述功能元件设置于所述第一连接段、所述下凹段和/或所述第二连接段上。
在一些实施例中，所述功能元件包括声学元件，所述声学元件通过所述声学输出端发声。
在一些实施例中，所述声学输出端包括出音孔，所述出音孔设置于以下至少一处：所述下凹段朝向用户头部的内侧、所述下凹段朝向所述用户耳屏的棱边或所述下凹段朝向所述用户耳屏的侧面。
在一些实施例中，所述声学输出端包括振动面，所述下凹段贴向用户头部的内侧设有所述振动面。
在一些实施例中，所述佩戴件包括左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部，所述左耳佩戴部和所述右耳佩戴部分别与用户的左、右耳稳定接触；所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部均设置有通信组件，所述通信组件用于传递所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部之间的信号。
在一些实施例中，所述通信组件为无线通信组件。
在一些实施例中，所述无线通信组件的通信方式包括蓝牙、红外、超宽带、或近场磁感应中的至少一种。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述可视件与所述佩戴件通过物理方式 连接，并且所述佩戴件能够沿与所述可视件的连接点相对所述可视件转动。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括相对位置检测装置，所述相对位置检测装置用于检测所述佩戴件相对于所述可视件的位置；其中，当所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于第一位置时，所述可穿戴设备为折叠状态；当所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于第二位置时，所述可穿戴设备为张开状态；当所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于过渡位置时，所述可穿戴设备为过渡状态。
在一些实施例中，所述相对位置检测装置包括设置在所述佩戴件和所述可视件连接处的弹簧式探针和导电金属部件；当所述弹簧式探针与所述导电金属部件断开时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第一位置或所述过渡位置；当所述弹簧式探针与所述导电金属部件电气连接时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置。
在一些实施例中，所述相对位置检测装置包括开关结构；当所述开关结构处于开路状态时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第一位置或所述过渡位置；当所述开关结构处于导通状态时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置。
在一些实施例中，所述相对位置检测装置包括磁体、导磁体和磁场检测器，所述磁体能够与所述导磁体耦合，所述磁场检测器用于检测所述磁体与所述导磁体之间的磁场强度；当所述磁体与所述导磁体之间的磁场强度超过设定的磁场强度阈值时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置；当所述磁体与所述导磁体之间的磁场强度未超过设定的磁场强度阈值时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第一位置或所述过渡位置。
在一些实施例中，所述相对位置检测装置还包括时间检测组件，所述时间检测组件用于检测所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置的持续时间。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备进一步包括可视件和快拆组件，所述快拆组件包括安装座和第一锁定件，所述安装座的一端设有插入腔，所述安装座与所述佩戴件或所述可视件其中之一连接，所述第一锁定件设置于所述安装座上且穿过所述插入腔，所述第一锁定件包括同轴设置的第一锁紧部和第一解锁部，所述第一解锁部沿轴向的投影位于所述第一锁紧部沿轴向的投影范围内；所述佩戴件或所述可视件中的另一个设有锁定孔，且插设于所述插入腔；当所述第一锁紧部位于所述锁定孔时，所述佩戴件或所述可视件中的另一个与所述插入腔相对固定；当所述第一解锁部取代所述第一锁紧部的位置而位于所述锁定孔时，所述第一解锁部能够脱离所述锁定孔。
在一些实施例中，所述快拆组件还包括第一弹性件，所述第一弹性件设置于所述安装座上且弹性抵接于所述第一锁紧部，所述第一弹性件用于提供弹力使得所述第一锁紧部移动到所述插入腔中。
在一些实施例中，所述第一弹性件设置于所述安装座内且弹性抵接于所述第一锁紧部背离所述第一解锁部的一端；当按压所述第一锁定件时，所述第一锁定件压缩所述第一弹性件，使得所述第一解锁部取代所述第一锁紧部而位于所述插入腔中；当解除按压所述第一锁定件时，所述第一弹性件推动所述第一锁定件复位使得所述第一锁紧部移动到所述插入腔中。
在一些实施例中，所述快拆组件还包括第一定位盖，所述第一定位盖设置于所述安装座上，所述第一弹性件弹性压缩设置于所述第一定位盖和所述第一锁紧部之间。
在一些实施例中，所述第一定位盖包括筒体、设置于所述筒体一端的底壁和设置于所述筒体另一端的挡环，所述第一锁紧部背离所述第一解锁部的一端设有倒扣，所述第一弹性件设置于所述筒体一端的底壁和所述第一锁紧部之间，所述第一锁紧部与所述筒体滑动设置，所述倒扣与所述挡环相配合以限制所述第一锁定件脱离所述第一定位盖。
在一些实施例中，所述安装座的另一端设有插入槽，所述佩戴件或所述可视件其中之一的一端设有插入部，所述插入部与所述插入槽可拆卸连接。
在一些实施例中，所述快拆组件还包括第二锁定件、第二弹性件和第二定位盖，所述第二锁定件包括同轴设置的第二锁紧部和第二解锁部，所述第二定位盖设置于所述安装座上，所述第二锁定件与所述第二定位盖滑动设置，且所述第二锁定件穿过所述插入槽，所述第二弹性件弹性压缩设置于所述第二定位盖和所述第二锁定件之间；所述插入部设有转动孔和与所述转动孔连通的通道，所述插入部插入所述插入槽，所述第二锁紧部位于所述转动孔中，且所述第二锁紧部与所述转动孔转动配合；按压所述第二锁定件的一端，使得所述第二解锁部取代所述第二锁紧部的位置而位于所述转动孔中，并通过所述通道分离所述第二锁紧部和所述转动孔。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括隔离件，所述隔离件与所述下凹段和/或所述连接段连接，当用户佩戴所述可穿戴设备时，所述隔离件至少包裹用户的耳部的一部分。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括设置于所述下凹段和/或所述连接段上的连接件， 所述隔离件通过所述连接件与所述下凹段和/或所述连接段连接。
在一些实施例中，所述连接件与所述佩戴件可拆卸连接。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述可视件与所述佩戴件通过物理方式连接，所述佩戴件包括左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部，所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部分别与用户的左、右耳稳定接触；所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部远离所述可视件的一端通过所述隔离件连接。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括调节件；所述佩戴件包括相对设置的连接端和架设端，所述架设端与用户的耳部稳定接触，所述调节件可替换地连接于所述连接端，以通过替换不同长度的所述调节件来调节所述佩戴件的长度。
在一些实施例中，所述佩戴件的所述连接端设置有第一卡扣，所述调节件连接所述佩戴件的端部设置有与所述第一卡扣适配的第二卡扣，所述调节件与所述佩戴件通过所述第一卡扣与所述第二卡扣配接实现连接。
在一些实施例中，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述可视件包括定位端，所述调节件的一端可拆卸地连接于所述佩戴件的所述连接端，另一端连接于所述可视件的所述定位端。
在一些实施例中，所述可视件的所述定位端设置有卡扣部，所述调节件连接所述可视件的端部设置有与所述卡扣部适配的卡合部；所述调节件与所述可视件通过所述卡合部与所述卡扣部的配接实现连接。
附图说明
本说明书将以示例性实施例的方式进一步说明，这些示例性实施例将通过附图进行详细描述。这些实施例并非限制性的，在这些实施例中，相同的编号表示相同的结构，其中：
图1是根据本说明书一些实施例提供的可穿戴设备的示意图；
图2是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备一实施例的结构示意图；
图3是根据本说明书另一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；
图4是根据本说明书又一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；
图5是根据本说明书再一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；
图6是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图7是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图8是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图9是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图10是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图11是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图12是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图13是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图；
图14是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔、振动面及功能孔的位置示意图；
图15是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔的位置示意图；
图16是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔的位置示意图；
图17是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔的位置示意图；
图18是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的设置有隔离件的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；
图19是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；
图20是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；
图21是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；
图22是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离连接件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；
图23是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离连接件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；
图24是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的两个佩戴件之间传递信号的示意图；
图25是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；
图26是图25实施例中可穿戴设备的结构拆分示意图；
图27是图25实施例中佩戴件的结构拆分示意图；
图28是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的U型构件和连接杆的连接结构示意图；
图29是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的相对位置检测装置的设置位置的示意图；
图30是根据本说明书一些实施例提供的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；
图31是图30所示可穿戴设备的爆炸结构示意图；
图32是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座的轴侧结构示意图；
图33是图31所示的快拆组件中第一锁定件、第一弹性件、第一定位盖和按键板的剖视结构示意图；
图34是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座与佩戴件连接的第一实施例的结构示意图；
图35是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座与佩戴件连接的第二实施例的结构示意图；
图36是图35所示安装座与佩戴件连接结构的另一视角的结构示意图；
图37是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座与佩戴件连接的第三实施例的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
为了更清楚地说明本说明书实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单的介绍。显而易见地，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本说明书的一些示例或实施例，对于本领域的普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图将本说明书应用于其它类似情景。除非从语言环境中显而易见或另做说明，图中相同标号代表相同结构或操作。
应当理解，本文使用的“系统”、“装置”、“单元”和/或“模组”是用于区分不同级别的不同组件、元件、部件、部分或装配的一种方法。然而，如果其他词语可实现相同的目的，则可通过其他表达来替换所述词语。
如本说明书和权利要求书中所示，除非上下文明确提示例外情形，“一”、“一个”、“一种”和/或“该”等词并非特指单数，也可包括复数。一般说来，术语“包括”与“包含”仅提示包括已明确标识的步骤和元素，而这些步骤和元素不构成一个排它性的罗列，方法或者设备也可能包含其它的步骤或元素。
图1是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的示意图。在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000的类型可以包括眼镜、智能手环、耳机、助听器、智能头盔、智能手表、智能服装、智能背包、智能配件等，或其任意组合。例如，可穿戴设备1000可以是功能型的近视眼镜、老花镜、骑行眼镜或太阳镜等，也可以是智能化的眼镜，例如具有耳机功能的音频眼镜，该可穿戴设备1000还可以是头盔、增强现实(Augmented Reality,AR)设备或虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)设备等头戴式设备。在一些实施例中，增强现实设备或虚拟现实设备可以包括虚拟现实头盔、虚拟现实眼镜、增强现实头盔、增强现实眼镜等或其任何组合。例如，虚拟现实设备和/或增强现实设备可以包括Google Glass、Oculus Rift、Hololens、Gear VR等。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括佩戴件100和可视件200。可视件200用于架设在用户身体的某个部位，例如，眼部、手部等位置。佩戴件100与可视件200的一端或两端连接，用于保持可穿戴设备1000与用户稳定接触。
图2是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备一实施例的结构示意图；图3是根据本说明书另一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；图4是根据本说明书又一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；图5是根据本说明书再一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图。图2至图5分别示例性地示出了几种常见的可穿戴设备的结构。
在一些实施例中，可视件200可以是镜片、显示屏或具有镜片作用的显示屏。在一些实施例中，可视件200还可以是镜片及其辅助部件或显示屏及其辅助部件，该辅助部件可以是镜框或支架等部件。在一些实施例中，可视件200也可以是不含有镜片或显示屏的辅助部件。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以是镜腿或头带等部件。例如佩戴件100为镜腿，则该可穿戴设备1000包括可视件200和两个佩戴件100，且两个佩戴件100分别连接于可视件200的两端，并用于分别架设于对应的左耳和右耳；例如佩戴件100为头带类部件，则头带类部件可进行调整以适应用户的头型，且其上也可设置有多种功能部件，则可穿戴设备1000包括一可视件200和一佩戴件100，佩戴件100的两端分别连接于可视件200的两端。
在图2所示的实施例中，可视件200为辅助部件，其包括支架部202和鼻架部203。鼻架部203与支架部202连接，鼻架部203用于支撑架设于用户的鼻梁。两个佩戴件100为镜腿并分别连接于支架部202的两端。支架部202上未设置镜片或显示屏等，以构成无镜片或显示屏的可穿戴设备1000。在一些实施例中，支架部202也可设置有镜片或显示屏。
在图4所示的实施例中，可视件200为具有显示屏的部件。佩戴件100为头带类部件。佩戴件100的两端分别连接于可视件200的两端，以形成可供框设于人体头部的头戴式设备。例如，头戴式AR设备或头戴式VR设备。
在图3和图5所示的实施例中，可视件200可以为镜片，两个佩戴件100为镜腿并分别连接于可视件200的两端。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000还包括光学模组205，光学模组205设置于可视件200或佩戴件100，光学模组205用于显示画面信息，以实现可穿戴设备1000的显示功能。如图2所示，光学模组205可以设置于可视件200上。在一些实施例中，光学模组205可以设置于支架部202，光学模组205为屏幕组件，用以显示画面。如图3所示，光学模组205可以设置于佩戴件100上。在一些实施例中，光学模组205可以包括全息准直透镜，其用于投射全息影像。光学模组205设置于佩戴件100(例如，下凹段20的安装部21上)，以向用户的眼前投影全息影像。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以与可视件200转动连接或伸缩连接等活动连接，也可以是卡接、螺接或一体成型连接等相对固定的连接方式。
应当注意的是，上述有关可穿戴设备1000的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明，而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说，在本说明书的指导下可以对可穿戴设备1000的进行各种修正和改变。然而，这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如，光学模组205和支架部202可以合并成一个单元，使支架部202具有显示画面的功能。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以为具备音频播放功能的设备。例如，可穿戴设备可以包括至少一组扬声器组件，扬声器组件产生声音后再通过气导或骨导的方式传递给用户。
扬声器组件可以用于将含有声音信息的信号转化为声音信号。例如，扬声器组件可以响应于接收含有声音信息的信号，产生机械振动以传递声波(即声音信号)。在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以包括振动元件和/或与振动元件连接的传振元件(例如，可穿戴设备1000的至少部分的壳体)。扬声器组件产生机械振动时伴随着能量的转换，扬声器组件可以实现含有声音信息的信号向机械振动转换。转换的过程中可能包含多种不同类型能量的共存和转换。例如，电信号(即含有声音信息的信号)通过扬声器组件的振动元件(图中未示出)中的换能装置(图中未示出)可以直接转换成机械振动，通过扬声器组件的传振元件传导机械振动以传递声波。再例如，声音信息可以包含在光信号中，一种特定的换能装置可以实现由光信号转换为振动信号的过程。其它可以在换能装置工作过程中共存和转换的能量类型包括热能、磁场能等。换能装置的能量转换方式可以包括动圈式、静电式、压电式、动铁式、气动式、电磁式等。
在一些实施例中，一个扬声器组件可以包括一个或多个骨传导扬声器。在一些实施例中，一个扬声器组件可以包括一个或多个气传导扬声器。在一些实施例中，一个扬声器组件可以同时包括一个或多个骨传导扬声器与一个或多个气传导扬声器的组合。
在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以设置在佩戴件100和/或可视件200。在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以设置在佩戴件100处，以便于将发出的声音传递给用户。在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以设置在佩戴件100的尾部(远离可视件200的一端)、头部(靠近可视件200的一端)或者尾部与头部之间的任一位置。例如，扬声器组件可以设置在佩戴件100的尾部，而佩戴件100的其他位置则没有设置扬声器组件。在一些实施例中，可以在佩戴件100的多个位置设置多个扬声器组件。例如，在佩戴件100的尾部、头部或者尾部与头部之间的任一位置均设置至少一个扬声器组件。
在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以设置在佩戴件100的外表面或者佩戴件100的内部。例如，扬声器组件可以设置在靠近佩戴件100与用户接触的位置(如，佩戴件100上靠近太阳穴到耳朵的位置)。又例如，佩戴件100可以包括用于容置扬声器组件的腔室，扬声器组件的至少一部分可以容置在腔室中。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以具有至少一个声学输出端，至少一个声学输出端可以与至少一个扬声器组件连接，用于将至少一个扬声器组件产生的声音信号传递给用户。
声学输出端可以理解为适宜将扬声器组件产生的声音信号传递给用户的结构。例如，当扬声器组件为骨传导扬声器时，是通过与用户接触的部件(例如，振动面33)向用户传递机械振动信号至用户的颅骨，从而使用户听到声音的。所以与用户接触并向用户传递机械振动的部件可以理解为声学输出端。又例如，若扬声器组件为气传导扬声器，当扬声器组件工作时，扬声器组件中的振膜会产生振动并引起扬声器组件内的空气产生振动(即声波)，声波可以通过可穿戴设备1000上的部件(例如，出音孔31)传递至可穿戴设备1000外部并进一步传递至用户耳部使用户听到声音，所以设置在可穿戴设备1000上用于引出声波的结构可以理解为声学输出端。在一些实施例中，声学输出端与扬声器组件可以通过导声元件(例如，导声管、声学腔体)连接。例如，声学输出端与扬声器组件距离较远，因此可以通过导声管将两者进行连接。又例如，气导扬声器和佩戴件100各自 具有一个壳体，气导扬声器的壳体和佩戴件100的壳体均开设有孔洞结构并通过导声管进行连通。气导扬声器产生的声波可以经由导声管和佩戴件100的壳体的孔洞结构传递至佩戴件100的外部。在一些实施例中，声学输出端可以是扬声器组件的一部分，扬声器组件产生的声音可以直接传递到声学输出端并由声学输出端传递至可穿戴设备1000外部。例如，气导扬声器设置在佩戴件100内部，气导扬声器的壳体即为佩戴件100的壳体，气导扬声器的壳体上设置有孔洞结构。当气导扬声器的振膜振动时会引起壳体内的空气振动，产生声波，声波可以经由壳体上的孔洞结构传递至壳体外部。该孔洞结构可以理解为声学输出端。
在一些实施例中，声学输出端可以设置于可穿戴设备1000的任意位置。例如，当可穿戴设备1000为图3所示的眼镜时，声学输出端可以设置于该眼镜的镜片、镜框和/或镜腿。
在一些实施例中，如果声学输出端位置越靠近用户耳部，则用户耳部所能接收到的声音信号的强度就越大。因此，在一些实施例中，声学输出端可以设置于可穿戴设备1000的佩戴件100上靠近用户耳部的位置，从而缩短声学输出端与用户耳部之间的距离。然而，在一些实施例中，佩戴件100为杆状或者条状，例如，当可穿戴设备1000为眼镜时，佩戴件100可以为直杆状结构，仅在佩戴件100的末端(远离可视件200的一端)有略微的弧度。当用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，佩戴件100与用户耳部的接触面或者接触点通常位于耳部上方，导致声学输出端与用户耳道的间隔仍然较长，影响了用户接收到的声音信号的强度。
基于上述原因，本说明书一些实施例提供一种佩戴件100，包括至少一个下凹段，该下凹段可以相对于佩戴件100的其他部分沿向下(即用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，朝向用户脖颈的方向)延伸凸起，进而使得佩戴件100形成凹陷，以此来更加靠近用户的耳屏。当声学输出端位于该下凹段时，可以更加靠近用户耳道，更便于传声。此外，相比于没有下凹段的情况，佩戴件100因下凹段的存在而具有更大的延伸长度，因而具有更好地柔韧性，更加适宜于根据用户的头型进行适应性形变，进而更加易于用户佩戴。下面将结合图2至图17对佩戴件100的下凹段进行详细描述。
如图2至图5所示，在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括至少一个佩戴件100以及与至少一个佩戴件100连接的可视件200。佩戴件100上设置有至少一个下凹段20以及与至少一个下凹段20连接的至少一个连接段10。至少一个下凹段使至少一个佩戴件上边沿在至少一个佩戴件有向下的凹陷。在本实施例中，由于下凹段20呈折叠的状态，从而可增加下凹段20的柔性。使得佩戴件100因下凹段20的存在而适宜于根据用户的头型进行适应性形变，进而更加易于用户佩戴。
图6至图12是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图。如图6至图12所示，在一些实施例中，至少一个下凹段20内具有至少一个声学输出端30。下凹段20可以用于安装声学输出端30并使得声学输出端30靠近用户耳部。连接段10可以用于连接下凹段20与可视件200以及架设于用户耳廓。
在一些实施例中，该佩戴件100可以包括至少一个连接段10和至少一个下凹段20，下凹段20可以与连接段10物理连接(例如，粘接、镶嵌、焊接、铆接、螺钉连接、卡扣连接等)；其中，下凹段20使佩戴件100上边沿在佩戴件100有向下的凹陷22，下凹段20内具有至少一个声学输出端30。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以为头戴式设备。当用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，佩戴件100可以与用户的耳部接触，例如，佩戴件与用户的耳廓接触，以保持稳定。其中至少一个连接段10用于与用户的耳廓稳定接触时，声学输出端30随下凹段20延伸向耳屏，以靠近用户的外耳道，便于自声学输出端30所传递的声音传导给用户。
在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以设置于下凹段20内，且与声学输出端30连接，并随下凹段20延伸向耳屏，以便于传递声音给用户。
需要说明的是，扬声器组件设置于下凹段20仅为示例，本领域技术人员容易获知，将扬声器组件设置于可穿戴设备1000的任意位置并采用导声管等导声元件引至位于下凹段20的声学输出端30，从而传入耳中的实施方案都是本说明书的简单变换。例如，扬声器组件可以设置在连接段10。又例如，扬声器组件可以设置在连接段10靠近可视件200的一端。还例如，扬声器组件可以设置在连接段10远离可视件200的一端。
为了方便理解，本说明书所描述的上方向可以为用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时朝向用户头顶的方向。本说明书所描述的下方向可以为朝向用户脖颈的方向。佩戴件100朝向用户头部的一侧为佩戴件100的内侧(即佩戴件100的内壁)，以与该内侧相反的一侧为外侧(即佩戴件100的外壁)。
如图6至图12所示，在一些实施例中，至少一个下凹段20可以使至少一个声学输出端30位于用户耳部附近。当佩戴件100设置有下凹段20之后，下凹段20会相对连接段10向下进行凹陷，从而缩短与用户耳部之间的距离。设置在下凹段20内的声学输出端30也因而更加靠近用户耳部。
在一些实施例中，至少一个下凹段20可以使得声学输出端30位于用户耳前。这里所说的耳前可以理解为用户耳朵朝向用户脸部的一侧。例如，在图6至图12所示的实施例中，当用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，下凹段20可以位于耳朵朝向用户眼睛的一侧，这样设置在下凹段20上的声学输出端30更靠近用户的耳屏，声学输出端30发出的声音信号可以更容易传递到用户耳部。
在一些实施例中，下凹段20可以位于耳廓背离用户眼睛的一侧。在一些实施例中，下凹段20可以使至少一个声学输出端30位于耳后。例如，至少一个声学输出端30的数量可以为多个，多个声学输出端30可以均位于耳后。在一些实施例中，当用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，用户的耳前和耳后可以均设置有至少一个声学输出端30。例如，至少一个声学输出端30的数量可以为多个，其中至少一个声学输出端30设置在下凹段20并随下凹段20位于用户耳前，至少一个声学输出端30设置在连接段10并随连接段10位于用户耳后。声学输出端30的设置形式、数量可以根据实际情况进行调整。
在一些实施例中，下凹段20可以设置成任意可行的形状。下凹段20的形态可以理解为下凹段20结构的形状或下凹段20的凹陷22的形状。示例性的下凹段20的形状可以包括但不限于Y形状、V形状、折叠状，下面将对几种示例性的下凹段进行说明。
如图6至图12所示。至少一个下凹段20可以包括呈角度连接的安装部21和过渡部23。声学输出端30可以设置在安装部21和/或过渡部23中。安装部21和过渡部23中的至少一个与连接段10弯折连接并向下延伸，以便于在佩戴时延伸向耳屏，拉近设置在其中的声学输出端30与外耳道之间的距离。其中，安装部21可以是指下凹段20更靠近可视件200的部分。过渡部23可以是指下凹段20更靠近用户耳部的部分。在一些实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23可以具有不同或相同的形状，下凹段20的安装部21和过渡部23可以以任意角度进行连接，从而形成不同形状的下凹段20。这里的下凹段20的安装部21和过渡部23以任意角度连接可以是指安装部21和过渡部23连接后形成的夹角可以是任意角度。在一些实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角的角度可以在5度～150度范围内。在一些实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角的角度可以在10度～150度范围内。在一些实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角的角度可以在15度～135度范围内。在一些实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角的角度可以在20度～120度范围内。在一些实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角的角度可以在30度～90度范围内。例如，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角可以呈30度、60度、90度或120度等。
在一些实施例中，安装部21与过渡部23之间可以采用可拆卸方式进行连接，例如螺接或插接等。在一些实施例中，连接段10与下凹段20之间可以是固定连接，例如，连接段10与下凹段20之间通过焊接、铆接、粘接等方式进行连接。在一些实施例中，安装部21与过渡部23之间还可以是直接连接，也可以通过调节结构连接。调节结构可以是铰链、球铰或伸缩杆等。调节结构可以使得过渡部23可以相对于安装部21转动或平移。
图6示例性地示出了一种下凹段20的实施方式。如图6所示，下凹段20可以呈V型，即安装部21和过渡部23形成的凹陷形状为V型。其中，过渡部23的一端与连接段10远离可视件200的部分(例如，第一连接段12)连接，另一端向下方延伸，过渡部23与连接段10形成的夹角近似为90度。安装部21的一端与连接段10靠近可视件200的部分(例如，第二连接段14)连接，另一端朝向用户的耳屏方向延伸并相对连接段10倾斜一定角度。安装部21与过渡部23连接并形成向下的V型凹陷22。在一些实施例中，过渡部23的长度可以小于安装部21的长度。这里的长度可以是指该部件端对端之间的距离，例如，过渡部23与第一连接段12连接的一端到与安装部21连接的一端的距离即为过渡部23的长度。在一些实施例中，过渡部23的横截面尺寸可以大于安装部21的横截面尺寸，横截面尺寸可以更直观地表示部件的粗细，例如，图6中过渡部23的横截面尺寸可以大于安装部21的横截面尺寸，可以是指过渡部23比安装部21更粗。在本说明书的其他实施例中，过渡部23的横截面尺寸可以小于或等于安装部21的横截面尺寸。在一些实施例中，为了使得在用户佩戴可穿戴设备时，设置于在下凹段里的声学输出端30离耳朵更近，可以使过渡部23与第一连接段12之间的夹角角度在一定范围内。在一些实施例中，过渡部23与第一连接段12之间的夹角角度在20度～120度之间。在一些实施例中，过渡部23与第一连接段12之间的夹角角度在25度～110度之间。在一些实施例中，过渡部23与第一连接段12之间的夹角角度在30度～100 度之间。在一些实施例中，过渡部23与第一连接段12之间的夹角角度在30度～90度之间。
图7示例性地示出了另一种下凹段的实施方式。与图6类似的，如图7所示下凹段20同样为V型。与图6不同的是，图7中的连接段10(例如，弯折部142)与安装部21远离过渡部23的一端形成连接并向上形成弯折的结构。弯折的结构可以进一步增加佩戴件100的延伸长度，使得佩戴件100柔韧性相对更佳，其对用户头型的适应性形变更易于发生。
图8示例性地示出了另一种下凹段的实施方式。如图8所示，过渡部23与安装部21同样形成一V型下凹段20。过渡部23的一端与连接段10连接并形成一弧面，该弧面的夹角为锐角。过渡部23的另一端朝用户耳屏的方向延伸。安装部21的一端与过渡部23远离连接段10的一端连接，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端可以位于连接段10(例如，第一连接段12)的延长线上，最终形成一V型结构的下凹段20。在一些实施例中，V型结构下凹段20的凹陷22的角度(也即安装部21与过渡部23之间形成的夹角)可以小于75度。在一些实施例中，V型结构下凹段20的凹陷22的角度可以小于60度。在一些实施例中，V型结构下凹段20的凹陷22的角度可以小于45度。在一些实施例中，V型结构下凹段20的凹陷的角度可以小于30度。在图8所示的实施例中，过渡部23的长度小于安装部21的长度。过渡部23的横截面尺寸小于安装部21的横截面尺寸。在一些实施例中，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端位于连接段10的延长线上，可以方便与可视件200直接连接，从而可使得佩戴件100更适于用户佩戴。在一些实施例中，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端也可以位于连接段10的延长线附近。例如，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端可以位于连接段10的延长线的上方(远离用户脖颈的一侧)或者下方(靠近用户脖颈的一侧)。
图9示例性地示出了另一种下凹段20的实施方式。如图9所示，安装部21和过渡部23可以连接形成L型的下凹段20。其中，安装部21的一端与连接段10(例如，弯折部142)连接，另一端沿左右方向朝用户耳屏一侧延伸。过渡部23的一端与连接段10(例如，第一连接段12)连接并与连接段10形成一弧度角。过渡部23的另一端沿上下方向延伸并与安装部21的另一端连接，最终形成一L型的下凹段20。在一些实施例中，L型下凹段20的凹陷22的角度(也即过渡部23与安装部21之间形成的夹角)可以大于90度。在一些实施例中，L型下凹段20的凹陷22的角度可以大于100度。在一些实施例中，L型下凹段20的凹陷22的角度可以大于110度。
此外，图10示例性地示出了另一种下凹段20的实施方式。在图10所示的实施例中，安装部21和过渡部23同样可以形成L型的下凹段20。过渡部23的长度小于安装部21的长度。与图9不同的是，安装部21和过渡部23之间形成的夹角的角度大致为直角，并且安装部21远离过渡部23的一端没有位于连接段10的延长线上。与图9类似的，在图10所示的实施例中，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端可以与可视件200直接连接。在一些实施例中，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端可以与可视件间接连接。例如，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端可以连接有连接段10(例如，第二连接段14)，通过连接段10与可视件200进行连接。
图11示例性地示出了另一种下凹段20的实施方式。如图11所示，安装部21和过渡部23可以连接形成Y型的下凹段20。在一些实施例中，安装部21的横截面尺寸可以小于过渡部23的横截面尺寸。安装部21的长度可以大于过渡部23的长度。过渡部23具有一定弧度，使得过渡部23远离连接段10(例如，第一连接段12)的一端朝向用户耳屏方向延伸。安装部21远离连接段10(例如，第二连接段14)与过渡部23连接形成一类似Y型的下凹段20。Y型的下凹段20的底部朝向用户耳屏的方向。Y型的下凹段20顶部的两个分支与连接段10进行连接(例如，过渡部23与第一连接段12连接，安装部21与第二连接段14连接)。在一些实施例中，声学输出端30可以设置于Y型下凹段20的顶部，例如，两个分支处。在一些实施例中，声学输出端30可以设置于Y型结构下凹段20的底部，以缩短与用户耳部耳屏之间的距离。
在一些实施例中，至少一个下凹段20可以包括多个下凹段20。如图12所示，至少一个下凹段20的数量可以为两个。位于右侧的下凹段20(简称为第一下凹段)的过渡部23与连接段10(例如，第一连接段12)和安装部21连接并形成一V型的凹陷22。位于左侧的下凹段20(简称为第二下凹段)的过渡部23与第一下凹段的安装部21连接和连接段(例如，第二连接段14)连接，同样形成一V型的凹陷22。两个V型凹陷22的夹角角度可以相同或者不同。
需要说明的是，前述一个或多个实施例仅出于说明目的，并不旨在限制下凹段20的形状或者数量。在完全理解下凹段20的原理之后，可以对下凹段20进行变形，以得到与本说明书实施例不同的下凹段20。例如，可以调整安装部21与过渡部23的形状，使得安装部21与过渡部23形成的下凹段20的形状为U型。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以包括多个下凹段20，每个下凹段20可以具有不同的形状。例如，佩戴件100可以包括两个下凹段20，其中一个下凹段20为图6所示 的V型结构，另一个下凹段20为图11所示的Y型结构。
如图6至图12所示，在一些实施例中，至少一个连接段10可以包括第一连接段12。过渡部23可以连接于安装部21和第一连接段12之间，且过渡部23与第一连接段12弯折连接并向下延伸。第一连接段12与下凹段20的过渡部23连接，用于将佩戴件100架设在用户耳廓。过渡部23可以相对第一连接段12向下延伸，进而形成凸出状的凹陷22，进而形成下凹段20。
在一些实施例中，下凹段20可以与可视件200直接连接。例如，在图8所示的实施例中，安装部21远离过渡部23的一端可以位于连接段10(例如，第一连接段12)的延长线上，以便于能够与可视件200进行连接。在一些实施例中，下凹段20和可视件200可以通过卡接、铆接、钉接、粘接等方式连接。在一些实施例中，下凹段20和可视件200可以为一体成型。
在一些实施例中，下凹段20可以通过额外的连接结构与可视件200连接。参见图7和图9所示，至少一个连接段10还可以包括第二连接段14。第二连接段14与安装部21的一端连接，第二连接段14远离安装部21的一端用于与可视件200连接。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个连接段10可以包括第一连接段12和第二连接段14。该至少一个下凹段20可以包括一个下凹段20。其中，下凹段20连接于第一连接段12和第二连接段14之间。第一连接段12用于架设于耳廓上。第二连接段14用于连接可视件200。在一些实施例中，第二连接段14可以呈直条状(如图6所示)，而连接于安装部2123的一端并向背离第一连接段12的方向延伸。下凹段20相对于第一连接段12和第二连接段14向下延伸，而相对第一连接段12和第二连接段14构成凸出状，且形成有凹陷22。
在一些应用场景中，在佩戴件100架设于用户的耳廓时，下凹段20可以位于耳廓朝向用户眼睛的一侧，以便于在用户佩戴时，下凹段20延伸向耳屏，使得设于下凹段20的声学输出端30随之贴近耳屏，以更接近用户的外耳道，拉近了声学输出端30与用户耳部的距离，从而更便于传声给用户，且还可降低环境音对声学输出端30出音的干扰。下凹段20上可以形成有凹陷22，使得该下凹段20呈折叠的状态，从而可增加下凹段20的柔性，使得佩戴件100因下凹段20的存在而适宜于根据用户的头型进行适应性形变，进而更加易于用户佩戴。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以是一体式结构，例如，第一连接段12、第二连接段14和下凹段20可以为一体成型。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100还可以是分体式结构，即佩戴件100可以由多个部件组合而成。例如，第一连接段12、第二连接段14和下凹段20可以为相互独立的部件，分别成型之后进行组装。在一些实施例中，第一连接段12和下凹段20可以为一体式结构，而第二连接段14为独立的部件。在一些实施例中，第二连接段14和下凹段20可以为一体式结构，而第一连接段12可以为独立的部件。
在一些实施例中，连接段10(例如，第一连接段12和第二连接段14)与下凹段20之间可采用可拆卸方式进行连接，例如，螺接或插接等。在一些实施例中，连接段10与下凹段20之间可以是固定连接，例如，连接段10与下凹段20之间通过焊接、铆接、粘接等方式进行连接。在一些实施例中，连接段10与下凹段20之间还可以是刚性连接，也可以通过调节结构连接，调节结构可以是铰链、螺杆螺帽、丝杠螺母等，调节结构可以使得下凹段20可以相对于连接段10转动或平移。
在一些实施例中，第二连接段14可以包括连接部140和弯折部142。连接部140可以用于连接可视件200与弯折部142。弯折部142可以相对与连接部140进行弯折，且弯折部142远离连接部140的一端与下凹段20的安装部21连接。通过设置弯折部142，能够增加佩戴件100的延伸长度，提高佩戴件100的柔韧性，提高用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时的舒适度。
如图9所示，在一些实施例中，第二连接段14可以包括连接的连接部140和弯折部142，弯折部142可以相对连接部140向下弯折，弯折部142远离连接部140的一端与下凹段20的安装部21连接，连接部140远离弯折部142的一端用于与可视件200(图中未示出)连接，其中连接部140沿背离第一连接段12的一侧延伸。
如图7所示，在一些实施例中，弯折部142可以相对连接部140向上弯折，且弯折部142可以与安装部21连接。相较于图9中的弯折部142而言，图7中的弯折部142远离连接部140的一端还会与安装部21形成弯折角，能够进一步增加佩戴件100的延伸长度，进而使得佩戴件100柔韧性相对更佳，其对用户头型的适应性形变更易于发生。
需要说明的是，上述有关连接部140以及弯折部142的内容不仅局限于第二连接段14。类似的，在一些实施例中，第一连接段12也可以具有连接部140和弯折部142。例如，第一连接段12的连接部140可以用于与过渡部23连接，而弯折部142可以连接在连接部140远离过渡部23的一端。弯折部142可以相对连接部140向下进行弯折并与用户耳朵背部相抵接，能够防止佩戴件100 自耳部脱离。
图13是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的佩戴件的结构示意图。如图13所示，第二连接段14可以包括相互连接的第一腿部141和第二腿部143。第一腿部141可以用于与可视件200连接，第二腿部143可以用于与安装部21连接。
在一些实施例中，第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以是固定连接，即第一腿部141与第二腿部143连接之后，第一腿部141无法相对第二腿部143活动。
在一些实施例中，第一腿部141可以相对第二腿部143活动。如图13所示，第二连接段14可以包括第一腿部141、第二腿部143和调节部145。第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以通过调节部145连接，且第一腿部141和第二腿部143通过调节部145可进行包括相对伸缩和/或旋转在内的操作。
在一些实施例，调节部145可以为伸缩组件，例如伸缩套杆等，则可通过调节部145使得第一腿部141和第二腿部143进行拉伸，以适配于不同的用户，进而方便用户佩戴。
在一些实施例中，调节部145可以为旋转组件，例如，球铰等铰链结构，则可通过调节部145使得第一腿部141和第二腿部143进行上下角度调节，以便于根据不同用户的生物特征进行适配调节，以更适于用户佩戴。
在一些实施例中，调节部145可以为伸缩组件和旋转组件的结合，从而使得第一腿部141和第二腿部143可通过调节部145可进行相对拉伸和旋转。
在一些实施例中，第一腿部和第二腿部还可以为可拆卸连接，以便于对第一腿部和/或第二腿部单独进行更换、维修。在一些实施例中，调节部可以为卡扣组件，通过卡扣组件可以实现第一腿部和第二腿部的相对固定和拆卸。在一些实施例中，除卡扣组件之外，调节部还可以包括螺钉连接组件、螺纹连接组件、铰链组件等。
在一些实施例中，第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以与前述实施例中的连接部140和弯折部142相结合。在一些实施例中，第一腿部141可以相当于前述实施例中的连接部140，则第二腿部143可以相当于与之连接的弯折部142。在一些实施例中，连接部140和弯折部142可以通过调节部145进行连接，从而使得连接部140与弯折部142可以实现相对旋转、拆卸，或者相对伸缩等操作。在一些实施例中，前述实施例中的连接部140可以包括第一部分和第二部分。第一腿部141可以相当于连接部140的第一部分，而第二腿部143可以包括弯折部142和连接部140的第二部分。当第一腿部141和第二腿部143连接之后即可组成连接部140和弯折部142。
在一些实施例中，第二连接段14可以同时包括第一腿部141和第二腿部143以及连接部140和弯折部142。例如，第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以是连接部140的子部件，即连接部140由第一腿部141和第二腿部143组装而成。在一些实施例中，连接部140可以由第一腿部141、第二腿部143以及调节部145组装而成。通过调节部145可以实现第一腿部141和第二腿部143的相对拉伸、旋转，进而使得连接部140的结构发生改变。又例如，第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以是第二连接段14除连接部140和弯折部142之外的独立部件的两个子部件。第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以组成该独立部件然后与连接部140或者弯折部142进行连接。在一些实施例中，连接部140与可视件200之间可以通过第一腿部141和第二腿部143连接。第一腿部141可以用于连接第二腿部143和可视件200。第二腿部143可以用于连接第一腿部141和连接部140。第一腿部141和第二腿部143可以通过调节部145连接。
在一些实施例中，当可穿戴设备1000为智能设备，包括但不限于音乐眼镜、骑行眼镜、AR设备、VR设备时。可穿戴设备1000上还设置有用于实现不同功能的至少一个功能元件。功能元件可以包括电源、声学元件(例如，扬声器组件)、控制部件(例如，芯片)或其他电气元件。关于功能元件的更多细节可以参见图24的描述，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，至少一个功能元件可以设置在佩戴件100上。例如，该至少一个功能元件可以设置于佩戴件100的第一连接段12、下凹段20和/或第二连接段14。在一些实施例中，至少一个功能元件的数量可以为一个，设置于佩戴件100的第一连接段12、下凹段20和/或第二连接段14上。在一些实施例中，至少一个功能元件的数量可以为多个。多个功能元件可以设置于佩戴件100的同一位置，例如，多个功能元件均设置于第一连接段12、下凹段20和/或第二连接段14上。在一些实施例中，多个功能元件可以设置于佩戴件100的不同位置，例如，多个功能元件分散设置于第一连接段12、下凹段20和第二连接段14上。
在一些实施例中，至少一个功能元件可以包括第一功能元件和第二功能元件，第一功能元件和第二功能元件电连接。第一功能元件和第二功能元件可以分别位于连接段10(例如，第一连接 段12)和下凹段20，可以均衡佩戴件100上的配重，以减小佩戴件100对鼻梁的压力，使得佩戴件100的重量大部分由耳廓承担，且还有利于减小可视件200部分对鼻梁的压力。
在一些实施例中，第一功能元件和第二功能元件可以分别设置在对应用户左、右耳部的佩戴件100上。例如，可穿戴设备1000为眼镜，佩戴件100为镜腿且数量为两个，分别对应用户的左、右耳，第一功能元件和第二功能元件可以分别设置在两个镜腿上。在一些实施例中，第一功能元件和第二功能元件可以对称设置在用户左、右耳部附近。例如，可穿戴设备1000为眼镜，佩戴件100为镜腿且数量为两个，分别对应用户的左、右耳。但第一功能元件和第二功能元件都设置在对应用户左侧耳部的镜腿上或者对应用户左侧耳部的镜腿上。
在一些实施例中，第一功能元件和第二功能元件可以是相同电气部件也可以是不同的电气部件。例如，第一功能元件可以为电源，第二功能元件为芯片，该机芯上可以集成有扬声元件(例如，扬声器组件)。又例如，第一功能元件为芯片，第二功能元件为电源。
在一些实施例中，声学元件35可以相对佩戴件100可拆卸或者相对佩戴件100固定连接。例如，声学元件35可拆卸地连接于下凹段20和/或连接段10上，比如可以设置于第一连接段12或第二连接段14上。又例如，直接采用粘接的方式将声学元件35与佩戴件100固定连接，使得声学元件35无法从佩戴件100上拆卸下来。
在一些实施例中，至少一个功能元件可以均安装于佩戴件100的内部。示例性的，佩戴件100内部可以开设有容纳腔120，功能元件(例如，第一功能元件和第二功能元件)可以均容纳在容纳腔120中。在一些实施例中，功能元件(例如，第一功能元件和第二功能元件)也可均从佩戴件100的外侧安装于佩戴件100上。在一些实施例中，多个功能元件中的一些(例如，第一功能元件)安装于佩戴件100的内部，另一些(例如，第二功能元件)从佩戴件100的外侧安装于佩戴件100上。
图5示例性地示出了一种功能元件与佩戴件100连接的实施例。如图5所示，功能元件可以包括至少一个声学元件35，且声学元件35与第一连接段12、下凹段20和/或第二连接段14可拆卸连接，声学元件35可以通过声学输出端30发声。在图5中所示的实施例中，下凹段20的过渡部23的外侧(即用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，过渡部23远离用户头部的一侧)开设有用于容纳声学元件35的卡槽230，声学元件35可以至少部分嵌设在卡槽230中与下凹段20的过渡部23连接。在一些实施例中，声学元件35还可以与佩戴件100内的其他功能元件(例如，芯片和电源等部件)电连接。在一些实施例中，声学元件35、电源及芯片(也称为机芯)等功能元件可以集成于一体，则当功能元件的集合体卡设于下凹段20时即可赋予佩戴件100具有音频功能。
需要说明的是，图5仅出于说明目的，并不旨在限制声学元件35的设置方式。当本领域技术人员完全理解功能元件(例如，声学元件35)以及佩戴件100的原理后，可以对其进行改进，以得到与图5不同的实施方案。在一些实施例中，声学元件35可以与佩戴件100的其他部件连接。例如，声学元件35可以与安装部21连接。在一些实施例中，声学元件35可以通过其他的连接方式与佩戴件100连接。例如，声学元件35和下凹段20(例如，过渡部23)设置有相互适配的插接结构，声学元件35可以插接在过渡部23上与过渡部23进行连接。又例如，佩戴件100可以包括紧固装置，声学元件35可以通过紧固装置和下凹段20(例如，过渡部23)连接。
在一些实施例中，声学元件35可以包括振膜以及磁路组件。在一些实施例中，振膜可以为长方形薄膜状。在一些实施例中，当声学元件35与卡槽230配接时，振膜可以位于卡槽230中。振膜可以朝向卡槽230的底壁设置。磁路组件可以提供磁场。磁场可以用于将含有声音信息的信号转化为机械振动信号。振膜与磁路组件连接，磁路组件产生的机械振动信号可以传递给振膜使得振膜发生机械振动。当振膜发生机械振动时可以产生声音。其中，产生声音的方式根据声学元件35的类型不同而不同。例如，当声学元件35为气导扬声器时，振膜可以引起空气发生振动，然后通过传音结构(例如，出音孔31)传递到可穿戴设备1000外部并由用户接收到，使用户听到声音。又例如，当声学元件35为骨导扬声器时，振膜可以与传音结构(例如，振动面33)连接，从而引起传音结构发生振动。传音结构可以将机械振动传递给用户，从而使用户听到声音。在图5所示的实施例中，传音结构可以设置在过渡部23朝向耳朵的侧壁上，以便于用户更好地接收到声音。关于传音结构的更多细节可以参见图14-图17的描述，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000还可以包括功能孔40。功能孔40可以设置在可视件200和/或佩戴件100上。可视件200和/或佩戴件100上设置的功能元件(例如，传感器)可以通过功能孔40探测数据。在一些实施例中，当可穿戴设备1000为智能设备，例如，音乐眼镜、骑行眼镜、AR头盔、VR头盔等时。可穿戴设备1000上设置的传感器可以用于探测、采集与用户相关的 数据。
图14是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔、振动面及功能孔的位置示意图。参阅图14，佩戴件100的内侧还可以设有功能孔40，佩戴件100内设的传感器(例如，设置在佩戴件100的腔体中)等功能元件可通过功能孔40执行相关操作。例如，探测、收集与用户相关的数据。
在一些实施例中，该功能孔40可以是传感器的探测孔，可通过该探测孔进行相关检测，例如，探测孔可以为红外传感器或距离传感器的探测孔，进而实现检测佩戴件100是否被用户佩戴的目的。在一些实施例中，当传感器检测用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000后，可以自行启动佩戴件100内的电气元件，例如，启动通信组件与终端设备(例如，手机)通信等。
在一些实施例中，该功能孔40还可以是光学传感器的探测孔，可检测佩戴件100是否被佩戴，以及监测用户的生物体征，例如，检测用户的心率或血氧含量等。在一些应用场景中，传感器还可在检测的生物体征失衡而存在潜在危害时提醒用户。
在一些实施例中，该功能孔40还可以是拾音孔，以用于接收用户的语音信号，从而用户可通过语音控制可穿戴设备1000，例如，拨打电话、播放音乐或询问路况天气等。
在一些实施例中，一个功能孔40可以执行一种或多种功能。例如，功能孔40可以如前述实施例中描述的执行单一的功能(例如，用于接收用户的语音、监测用户的生物体征等)。又例如，功能孔40既可以作为拾音孔，也可以作为光学传感器的探测孔。
在一些实施例中，功能孔40可以设置于第一连接段12、下凹段20和/或第二连接段14上。在一些实施例中，功能孔40的数量可以为一个，一个功能孔40可以设置在第一连接段12、下凹段20或第二连接段14其中一个上。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以设置有多个功能孔40，以分别执行不同的功能。在一些实施例中，多个功能孔40可以设置在佩戴件100的不同部位。例如，第一连接段12设置有至少一个拾音孔，下凹段20设置有至少一个探测孔。又例如，第一连接段12、下凹段20均设置有至少一个拾音孔，第二连接段14设置有至少一个探测孔。
在一些实施例中，声学输出端30可以包括传音结构，传音结构可以理解为与扬声器组件连通的部件，扬声器组件产生的声音信号可以通过导声元件(例如，导声管)传递到传音结构，然后通过传音结构传递到可穿戴设备1000外部并由用户接收到。其中，传音结构可以包括出音孔31和/或振动面33，设置于佩戴件100内的扬声器组件通过该出音孔31和/或振动面33传音给用户。其中，出音孔31可以理解为与扬声器组件连通的孔洞，扬声器组件产生的声音信号可以通过导声元件(例如，导声管、声学腔体)传递到出音孔31，然后经由出音孔31传递到可穿戴设备1000外部并由用户接收到。振动面33可以理解为与用户接触向传递机械振动的部件。
在一些实施例中，可以根据扬声器组件的类型确定声学输出端30上设置的传音结构(即出音孔31或振动面33)。
在一些实施例中，当扬声器组件包括气导扬声器时，传音结构可以为出音孔31。在一些实施例中，下凹段20设有出音孔31，出音孔31可以随下凹段20靠近用户耳部，以便于向用户传递声音。
在一些实施例中，出音孔31可以设置在下凹段20与用户头部接触的位置。在一些实施例中，下凹段20贴向用户头部的内侧设有出音孔31，以便于向用户传递声音。在一些实施例中，该出音孔31的数量可以设置为1个、2个、3个或更多。例如，如图14所示，在下凹段20的内侧边缘处设置有2个出音孔31，以在用户佩戴时尽可能地贴近于用户的外耳道，提升用户的听觉效果。
在一些实施例中，出音孔31可以设置在靠近下凹段20与用户头部接触的位置。图15是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔的位置示意图。继续以用户佩戴该佩戴件100为参考，如图15所示，在一些实施例中，下凹段20朝向耳屏的棱边可以设有出音孔31，该出音孔31不会被头皮所完全遮挡，进而即使处于佩戴状态下该出音孔31还可部分暴露于空气中且朝向用户的外耳道，更有利于提升向用户的外耳道的出音效果。
图16是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔的位置示意图。如图16所示，在一些实施例中，下凹段20朝向耳屏的侧面可以设有出音孔31，该位置的出音孔31完全不会被头皮所遮挡，处于佩戴状态下该出音孔31还可完全暴露于空气中且朝向用户的外耳道，可进一步提升向外耳道的出音效果。
[57]图17是图13所示佩戴件中出音孔的位置示意图。如图17所示，在一些实施例中，下凹段20的内侧和朝向耳屏的侧面均设有出音孔31，该双侧的出音孔31可通过两个方向向用户的外耳道传递声音，进一步提升出音效果。
参阅图14，在一些实施例中，当扬声器组件包括骨导扬声器时，传音结构可以为振动面33。在一些实施例中，振动面33可以设置在下凹段20贴向头皮的内侧。
在一些实施例中，当扬声器组件同时包括骨传导扬声器和气传导扬声器时，传音结构可以包括振动面33和出音孔31。例如，振动面33可以设置在下凹段20贴向头皮的内侧，当用户佩戴眼镜1时能够直接与用户接触，以便于接收用户发声时传递的机械振动信号。而出音孔31可以设置在下凹段20朝向耳屏的侧面。
可穿戴设备1000的部件构成还可以有其他实施例，本说明书对此不一一列举，并对其具体构成和形状不作限制。本说明书公开了一种可穿戴设备1000及其可视件200和佩戴件100。通过在佩戴件100上设置至少一个连接段10和至少一个下凹段20，下凹段20与连接段10物理连接，且下凹段20上形成有向下的凹陷，使得下凹段20呈折叠的状态，从而可增加下凹段20的柔性，使得佩戴件100因下凹段20的存在而适宜于根据用户的头型进行适应性形变，进而更加易于用户佩戴，且下凹段20还具有至少一个声学输出端30，从而使得该声学输出端30可随下凹段20拉进与用户耳部的距离，更便于传声给用户，从而使得用户无需将声学输出端30塞入外耳道即可实现传声，提高了佩戴件100的佩戴舒适性和降低了佩戴难度。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以为眼镜，包括骑行眼镜、太阳镜、近视眼镜、AR/VR眼镜等。特别的，可穿戴设备1000可以为一种骑行眼镜。该骑行眼镜可以适用于用户在骑车、驾驶或运动时进行佩戴。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100通常为杆状结构(例如，镜腿)、条状或带状结构(例如，织带)。佩戴件100上缺少对耳朵进行遮蔽的掩体，用户在使用时可能会受到风噪干扰。特别的，当用户在上述应用场景中佩戴眼镜(例如，骑行眼镜)时，可能会处于高速运动、逆风运动以及侧风运动状态，风噪干扰更为强烈。使得用户听到外界环境音的能力受影响，长时间的大音量风噪可能导致用户听力衰减。此外，在一些实施例中，当可穿戴设备1000(例如，骑行眼镜)具有音频功能时，风噪干扰也会影响用户接收可穿戴设备1000发出的声音信号，导致用户无法听清或者完全听不见声音，进一步降低用户使用体验。
基于上述原因，本说明书还涉及对佩戴件100结构的更多改进，使得佩戴件100具备降风噪功能。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以包括降风噪组件，降风噪组件被配置为当用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，可以一定程度上将耳部与外界隔离，减小用户受到的风噪干扰。下面将结合图18-图23中的实施例对该降风噪组件进行详细描述。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括可视件200、佩戴件100以及设置在佩戴件100上的降风噪组件。降风噪组件可以包括隔离件，隔离件可以设置在佩戴件100靠近耳部的位置以便于对用户耳部进行遮蔽，减小用户耳部处的风噪干扰。图18是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的设置有隔离件的可穿戴设备的结构示意图。如图18所示，可穿戴设备可以包括可视件200、设置在可视件200两端的两个佩戴件100以及设置在佩戴件100上的隔离件300。特别的，可穿戴设备1000可以是一种眼镜。佩戴件100可以为镜腿。可视件200可以包括镜框210和镜片220。镜片220可以设置在镜框210上以组成有框眼镜。两个镜腿转动连接于镜框210的两侧，隔离件300与镜腿物理连接，以用于包裹耳朵。在一些实施例中，可视件200可以仅包括两个镜片220和两个镜片220之间的连接件，镜腿与镜片220的一侧连接，从而形成一无框眼镜。或者，眼镜还可以包括未安装镜片220的镜框210，镜腿与镜框210连接，可形成一装饰用的眼镜。
在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以与前述一个或多个实施例中的下凹段20和/或连接段10结合。图19是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；图20是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图；图21是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图。如图19至21所示，该佩戴件100可以包括至少一个连接段10和至少一个下凹段20，下凹段20与连接段10物理连接，下凹段20使佩戴件100上边沿在佩戴件100有向下的凹陷22。隔离件300可以与下凹段20物理连接，以用于包裹耳朵，减少风噪干扰。在一些实施例中，下凹段20和/或隔离件300内可以具有至少一个声学输出端30(图19至图21中未示出)。
在佩戴件100架设于用户的耳廓时，下凹段20位于耳廓朝向用户眼睛的一侧，以便于在用户佩戴时，下凹段20延伸向耳屏。当声学输出端30设置于下凹段20上时，使得设于下凹段20的声学输出端30随之贴近耳屏，以更接近用户的外耳道，拉近了声学输出端30与用户耳部的距离，从而更便于传声给用户，且还可降低环境音对声学输出端30出音的干扰。当声学输出端30设置于隔离件300上(例如，出音孔31和/或振动面33位于或者被包裹于隔离件300上，以减少风噪干扰。)时，下凹段20可方便隔离件300的固定连接并包裹耳朵，防止耳朵与风直接接触，减少湍流产生的几率，达到减少风噪的效果。关于下凹段20、声学输出端30以及连接段10的更多细节可以参见图2至图17的描述，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以与下凹段20和/或连接段10进行连接。例如，隔离件300可以只与下凹段20连接。又例如，隔离件300可以只与连接段连接。还例如，隔离件300可以既与下凹段20连接，同时也与连接段10连接。
图18示例性地示出了隔离件与佩戴件连接的其中一种实施例。如图18所示，隔离件300的形状大致呈圆形。隔离件300与下凹段20的过渡部23远离安装部21的一侧连接。
图19示例性地示出了隔离件与佩戴件连接的另一种实施例。图19所示的佩戴件100与图18所示的佩戴件100可以相同。不同之处在于图19所示的隔离件300为环状结构。环状结构的隔离件300的两端均与过渡部23远离安装部21的一侧连接。其中一端靠近第一连接段12并且与第一连接段12连接。另外一端远离第一连接段12。图19所示的隔离件300同时与过渡部23以及第一连接段12连接，在一定程度上提高了隔离件300与佩戴件100的连接强度。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括两个佩戴件100，分别用于架设在用户的左、右耳部。其中，架设在用户右耳的佩戴件100可以称为右耳佩戴部，架设在用户左耳的佩戴件100可以称为左耳佩戴部。左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部远离可视件200的一端可以通过至少一个隔离件300连接。这里所指的左耳佩戴部或者右耳佩戴部是指可穿戴设备1000供用户佩戴的部分。在一些实施例中，左耳佩戴部和右耳佩戴部可以是同一佩戴件100的不同部分。例如，当佩戴件100为图4所示的环形头带时，左耳佩戴部和右耳佩戴部分别是指佩戴件100的分别与用户左、右耳稳定接触的部件。在一些实施例中，左耳佩戴部和右耳佩戴部也可以是不同的佩戴件100。例如，当佩戴件100为图2所示的镜腿，两个佩戴件分别为架设在用户左、右耳的镜腿时，与左耳接触的镜腿可以称之为左耳佩戴部，与右耳接触的镜腿可以称之为右耳佩戴部。
如图20所示，隔离件300的一端可以与过渡部23远离安装部21的侧壁连接。示例性的连接的方式可以包括粘接、卡接、钉接等。在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以为条形结构或者片状结构，例如，隔离片、隔离条等。在一些实施例中，隔离件300的远离过渡部23一端可设置有磁性材料(例如，磁铁)，磁性材料可以用于连接其他隔离件300。例如，为了增加对耳部的保护范围，可以增加设置在佩戴件100上的隔离件300的数量。又例如，通过在隔离件300上设置磁性材料，可以将左、右耳部两侧的佩戴件100上的隔离件300连接。左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部均设置有一个隔离件300，每个隔离件300远离与其连接的过渡部23的一端均设置有磁性材料。设置在左耳佩戴部的隔离件300设置磁性材料的一端可以与设置在右耳佩戴部的隔离件300设置磁性材料的一端吸附连接，两个隔离件300环绕在用户头部的后方以使隔离件300既能够包裹耳朵，避免耳朵与风直接接触，又能起到对佩戴件100的固定作用，防止佩戴件100自耳朵脱落，并且穿戴方便。在一些实施例中，隔离件300远离过渡部23的一端还可设置有魔术贴、卡扣等结构，以便于与其他的隔离件300相互连接。
如图21所示，隔离件300可为弹性条形结构，例如，织带。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以包括与用户左、右耳稳定接触的左耳佩戴部和右耳佩戴部。左耳佩戴部和右耳佩戴部远离可视件200的一端可以通过一个隔离件300(例如，织带)连接。例如，在图21所示的实施例中，隔离件300的一端与右耳佩戴部的过渡部23连接固定，隔另一端与左耳佩戴部上的过渡部23连接固定(图中未示出)。使得隔离件300既能够包裹耳朵，避免耳朵与风直接接触，又能起到对佩戴件100的固定作用，防止佩戴件100自耳朵脱落，另外由于隔离件300具有弹性，使得具有该佩戴件100的可穿戴设备1000能够适应不同尺寸的头型。
在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以为弹性件，例如，隔离件300可以采用弹性材料制作而成，从而具有一定弹性。示例性的弹性材料可以包括硅胶、橡胶、氨纶、涤纶、聚酯纤维等。在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以采用吸水材料制作而成，以吸收耳部的汗液，保持耳部干爽、舒服。示例性的吸水材料可以包括海绵、棉布等。在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以采用保暖材料制作而成，以避免寒天天气耳部皮肤皲裂。示例性的保暖材料可以包括岩棉、玻璃棉、绒面布等。
在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以包括固定部和柔性部。其中固定部可与佩戴件100连接以确保隔离件300的结构强度。柔性部可朝向耳廓方向设置，由于柔性部具有一定柔性，因此可以用于缓冲固定部与耳朵之间的作用力，对耳朵进行保护。在一些实施例中，柔性部可以采用硅胶、橡胶等材料制作而成。在一些实施例中，柔性部可以是隔离件300的一部分，而固定部可以是独立部件，并单独设置在隔离件300上用于与佩戴件100连接的部件。例如，隔离件300可以由包括硅胶、橡胶等在内的弹性材料制作，因此隔离件300具有一定柔韧性。通过在隔离件300上设置硬度较高的固定部与佩戴件100连接。在一些实施例中，隔离件300可以为多种材料制作而成的复合结构。例如，隔离件300是由弹性结构(例如，由硅胶制作而成)和刚性结构(例如，由不锈钢制作 而成)叠放组合成的复合结构。弹性结构位于靠近用户耳部的一侧，通过弹性结构对用户耳朵进行保护。刚性结构位于远离用户耳部的一侧，通过刚性结构与佩戴件100进行连接。
图22是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离连接件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图。如图22所示，可穿戴设备1000可以包括连接于佩戴件100上的隔离连接件400，隔离件300通过与隔离连接件400连接固定，实现与佩戴件100的物理连接。在一些实施例中，用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，第一连接段12架设在用户的耳廓。因此为了让隔离件300更好的包裹耳部，可以使隔离连接件400可连接于下凹段20，并使隔离件300能够设置于过渡部23远离安装部21的一侧。
在一些实施例中，隔离连接件400可以包括连接板401以及自连接板401的部分边缘延伸形成的卡板402。连接板401的形状对应于过渡部23侧表面的形状。卡板402能够卡持在过渡部23的边缘，以实现隔离连接件400与过渡部23的可拆卸连接。在一些实施例中，卡板402上可以设有卡接部4021，隔离件300可以通过卡接部4021与隔离连接件400连接固定，以实现与佩戴件100的物理连接。
在其他实施方式中，隔离连接件400可通过固定件(图未示)譬如螺钉、焊接、或一体成型等方式与佩戴件100固定连接，在此不一一列举。
图23是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的隔离连接件与佩戴件连接的结构示意图。如图23所示，在一些实施例中，隔离连接件400还能够连接于连接段10，例如，连接件可以与第一连接段12和/或第二连接段14，只要满足隔离件300能够至少部分地包裹耳部即可。在图23所示的实施例中，隔离连接件400连接在第二连接段14上。
在一些实施例中，隔离连接件400可以为半封闭结构的卡环。第一连接段12和/或第二连接段14的相背两侧表面相对设置有至少一对卡孔101，连接件400的两端分别卡持于卡孔101中，实现隔离连接件400与佩戴件100的物理连接。通过上述设计，隔离连接件400不仅可与佩戴件100可拆卸连接，还是实现对连接件400位置的调节，以适应不同尺寸的头型。
除通过隔离连接件400连接隔离件300以及佩戴件100之外，在一些实施例中，佩戴件100与隔离件300可以通过卡扣组件、卡勾组件等结构进行连接。例如，佩戴件100上可以设置有隔离配接件，隔离配接件可以为通孔、卡扣、卡勾等结构，隔离件300可以与隔离配接件配接，实现与佩戴件100的连接。在一些实施例中，隔离配接件可以与前述一个或多个实施例中的固定部相结合。例如，隔离配接件可以设置在固定部上，提高连接强度。
可穿戴设备1000的部件构成还可以有其他实施例，本说明书对此不一一列举，并对其具体构成和形状不作限制。区别于现有技术的情况，本说明书公开了一种可穿戴设备1000，特别的，可穿戴设备1000可以是一种眼镜。通过佩戴件100上设置隔离件300，能够避免耳朵与风直接接触，又能起到对佩戴件100的固定作用，防止佩戴件100自耳朵脱落。另外，通过在佩戴件100上设置卡扣，实现佩戴件100与隔离连接件400的可活动连接，进而可以根据实际需要调节隔离连接件400相对佩戴件100的位置，使得可穿戴设备1000能够适应不同尺寸的头型。
应当注意的是，上述有关隔离件300的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明，而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说，在本说明书的指导下可以对隔离件300进行各种修正和改变。然而，这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如，隔离件300与隔离连接件400可以合并成一个部件。又例如，第一连接段12可以与隔离件300一体成型，用于架设在用户头部并对用户耳部进行遮蔽。又例如，第一连接段12可以省略，隔离件300可以设置在下凹段20的过渡部23上。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000中通常设置有多个功能元件以使得可穿戴设备1000具有不同的功能。例如，可穿戴设备1000可以为一种音频眼镜，该音频眼镜上可以设置有多个功能元件，包括电源、声学元件(例如，扬声器组件)、控制组件(例如，芯片(又称机芯)、MCU)、通信组件等。其中，声学元件、电源等可以被归类为外围元件。电源可以用于给其他功能单元提供电力。声学元件可以播放和/或接收音频信号。控制组件(例如，芯片、MCU)可以被归类为核心元件。
在一些实施例中，声学元件可以包括扬声器组件，扬声器组件产生的声音信号可以通过前述实施例中的声学输出端30(例如，出音孔31、振动面33)输出使得用户听到声音。在一些实施例中，声学元件可以包括麦克风组件，麦克风组件可以用于接收来自外界的声音信号(例如，语音信号、噪声信号)转换为电信号，以实现通话、语音、人机交互等功能。在一些实施例中，声学元件可以包括麦克风组件和扬声器组件，以使得可穿戴设备1000同时具备音频播放和接收功能。
控制电路组件可以处理来自可穿戴设备1000中其他功能元件的数据以及对其他功能元件进行控制。例如，控制电路组件可以处理通信组件的相关数据并将音频数据传递给扬声器组件。在 一些实施例中，控制电路组件可以控制可穿戴设备1000中其它功能元件(例如，通信组件、电源、处理器等)的运行状态。例如，当电源电量低于阈值时，控制电路组件可以控制电源进入省电模式，处于该模式下的电源工作时的功率更低。
通信组件可以用于信息或数据的交换。在一些实施例中，通信组件可以用于可穿戴设备1000的功能元件(例如，控制电路组件、处理器、电源、声学元件等)之间的通信。例如，电源可以发送与剩余电量相关的信息到通信组件，通信组件可以将所述信息发送给处理器。在一些实施例中，通信组件可以用于可穿戴设备1000与手机、平板电脑或其他可穿戴设备等进行通信。
在一些实施例中，一个或多个功能元件可以设置在佩戴件100上。例如，功能元件还可以包括前述实施例中的传感器，传感器可以设置于佩戴件100的功能孔40内。
在一些实施例中，当可穿戴设备1000为双耳式头带设备时，佩戴件100的数量可以为两个，分别对应用户的左、右耳部。例如，当可穿戴设备1000为图18所示的眼镜时，佩戴件100为架设在用户左、右耳廓的两个镜腿。又例如，当可穿戴设备1000为图4所示的AR或VR眼镜时，佩戴件100可以为一个环形头带，环形头带的两端分别与可视件200的两端连接。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以包括左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部，分别对应于用户的左耳和右耳。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000包括可视件200以及连接在可视件200两端的两个佩戴件100(可称为第一佩戴件和第二佩戴件)。图24是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的两个佩戴件之间传递信号的示意图。在一些实施例中，第一佩戴件和第二佩戴件上分别包括一个通信组件(例如，第一通信组件810和第二通信组件820)，通信组件可以用于传递两个佩戴件100之间的信号。其中，两个佩戴件100之间的信号可以是指两个佩戴件100上的功能元件(例如，第一外围元件610和第二外围元件620)产生的信号。包括但不限于声学元件(例如，扬声器组件)、电源等电气部件。示例性的，扬声器组件可以包括第一扬声器组件和第二扬声器组件。电源可以包括第一电源和第二电源。其中，第一扬声器组件和第一电源组件可以设置在第一佩戴件上，第二扬声器组件和第二电源组件可以设置在第二佩戴件上。第一佩戴件上的元件产生的信号可以传递到第二佩戴件的元件，例如，第一扬声器组件产生的声音信号可以通过通信组件(通过第一通信组件810传递到第二通信组件820)传递到第二扬声器组件中。在一些实施例中，佩戴件还可以包括：控制电路组件(例如，第一控制电路组件710和第二控制电路组件720)，控制电路组件可以通过通信组件与两个佩戴件上的元件进行通信。例如，第一扬声器组件可以为主扬声器，第二扬声器组件可以为副扬声器，控制电路组件可以控制主扬声器开启或关闭，主扬声器开启或关闭时可以通过通信组件发送对应的操作信号至副扬声器，使得副扬声器同时开启或关闭。
在一些实施例中，控制电路组件的数量可以不受限制。例如，控制电路组件的数量可以是一个，设置在第一佩戴件或第二佩戴件上。例如，当设置于第一佩戴件时，控制电路组件与第一佩戴件上的元件(例如，第一扬声器组件、第一电源等)之间可以通过通信组件进行有线和/或无线通信。控制电路组件与第二佩戴件上的元件(例如，第二麦克风组件、第二扬声器组件、第二电池等)之间可以通过通信组件进行无线通信。
在一些实施例中，通信组件可以为有线通信组件，例如，通信组件可以包括导线组(图中未示出，佩戴件100和/或可视件200内设置有供导线组经过的导线通道，导线组可以通过导线通道分别连接第一元件和第二元件以及控制电路组件，以便于通过控制电路组件对左右两个佩戴件上的元件进行控制。
在一些实施例中，通信组件可以为无线通信组件，无线通信组件可以通过无线通信的方式建立元件之间以及元件与控制电路组件的通信连接。在控制电路组件和元件通过无线通信组件建立起无线连接后，可以通过控制电路组件控制元件，例如，可以控制第一扬声器组件产生声音信号，控制第二扬声器组件停止产生声音信号。在一些实施例中，无线通信组件的无线通信方式可以包括蓝牙、红外、超宽带(Ultra Wideband,BW)、近场磁感应(Near Field Magnetic Induction,NFMI)等无线通信方式中的任意一种。
应当注意的是，上述有关功能元件的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明，而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说，在本说明书的指导下可以对功能元件进行各种修正和改变。然而，这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如，声学元件和通信组件可以合并成一个单元，使其同时具有声学元件的功能(例如，播放声音信号的功能)和进行信息或数据的交换的功能。又例如，声学元件还可以包括麦克风组件，麦克风组件可以通过通信组件与扬声器组件进行通信。在一些实施例中，麦克风组件可以将其接收到的声音信号转换为电信号，并通过通信组件传递给扬声器组件，扬声器组件可以将电信号转换为声音信号传递给用户。在一些实施例中，扬声器组件可以 集成于芯片上。在一些实施例中，机芯可以包括处理器和通信组件等。
在一些实施例中，不同的用户可能具有不同的头型(即头部形状)或者头部尺寸，因此不同用户佩戴同一款可穿戴设备1000可能具有不同的佩戴体验。头部尺寸可以包括头部左右宽度(即额头的宽度或者两侧太阳穴之间的距离)和头部前后长度(即后脑勺至前额的距离)。示例性的，头部尺寸较大的用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000可能会感觉到较为强烈的挤压感。头部尺寸较小的用户佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，可穿戴设备1000与用户头部贴合度较差，可穿戴设备1000可能会发生掉落。此外，在一些实施例中，用户的头型和头部尺寸还会导致佩戴件上的声学输出端30与耳部之间的距离发生变化，影响声学输出端30的声音传递。示例性的，当用户的头部前后长度较短时，可能会导致声学输出端30位于耳部前方并且距离耳部较远。当用户的头部前后长度较长时，可能会导致声学输出端30位于耳部前后方并且距离耳部较远。
基于上述原因，本说明书一些实施例还提供一种尺寸可调节的可穿戴设备1000，其可以通过替换不同尺寸的可视件、佩戴件以及连接可视件与佩戴件的连接结构来调节可穿戴设备1000的尺寸和/或声学输出端30与用户耳部的距离，不仅可以有效提高用户的佩戴体验，还可以缩短声学输出端30与用户耳部的距离，提高声学输出端30的传音效果。
图25是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可穿戴设备的结构示意图；图26是图25实施例中可穿戴设备的结构拆分示意图；图27是图25实施例中佩戴件的结构拆分示意图。结合图25至图27所示，在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括可视件200和与可视件200连接的佩戴件100。在本实施例中，可穿戴设备1000为眼镜，可视件200可以包括镜片组件，佩戴件100可以包括镜腿。眼镜可以为无框眼镜(即有镜片而无镜框)、有框眼镜(即有镜片且有镜框)或者装饰用眼镜(即有镜框而无镜框)。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以包括两个镜腿，每一个镜腿分别与可视件200可拆卸连接。一方面，两个镜腿可架设于用户的耳廓，给眼镜提供较为稳定的支撑力；另一方面，两个镜腿可产生施加在用户头部的夹持力，使得眼镜可以较为稳定地佩戴于用户头部。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100还可以包括调节件150。调节件150的两端分别连接镜腿和镜片组件，以实现镜腿和镜片组件的连接。在本实施例中，调节件150和镜片组件可拆卸连接，以便于更换不同规格的调节件150，进而通过替换不同长度的调节件150以调节镜腿的长度，从而适应不同的用户，以解决镜腿过长或过短会使佩戴的用户感到不舒适的技术问题。
在一些实施例中，可视件200可以包括设置在镜片组件上的定位端240，该定位端240可设有两个且分别设置于镜片组件的两侧，以对应两个镜腿。其中，调节件150的一端和镜片组件的定位端240可拆卸连接。下文中仅以一个定位端240和一个镜腿的配合关系为例进行说明。
镜片组件的定位端240设有卡扣部241，调节件150连接镜片组件的端部设有卡合部152，卡扣部241和卡合部152配合以实现镜腿和镜片组件的连接。其中，卡扣部241可以是卡块，卡合部152可以是卡槽，卡块插设于卡槽中以实现镜腿和镜片组件的连接。
在一些实施例中，当镜片组件由两个镜片和两个镜片之间的连接件形成一无框眼镜时，卡合部152可以是卡槽，卡扣部241可以是沿镜片边沿延伸伸出的卡块，将该卡块插设于卡槽中即可完成镜腿和镜片组件的装配。当需要进行拆卸时，直接分离卡合部152和卡扣部241即可。
在一些实施例中，当镜片组件包括镜框时，卡合部152可以是卡槽，卡扣部241可以是设于镜框边沿的卡块，将该卡块插设于卡槽中即可完成镜腿和镜片组件的装配。在一些替代性实施例中。卡合部152可以是卡块，卡扣部241可以是设于镜框边缘的卡槽，将卡块插设于卡槽中即可完成镜腿和镜片组件的装配。
在另一些实施例中，镜片组件的边沿(例如，镜框)可以采用磁性材料制成，调节件150内部可设有磁性件例如磁铁，通过磁性吸引的方式实现镜腿和镜片组件的装配。
在一些实施例中，调节件150能够被配置为可替换的不同规格的调节件150，即为一副眼镜配置多个不同规格的调节件150，其中每一个调节件150均可通过上述实施方式与镜片组件实现可拆卸连接，进而可以通过不同规格的调节件150来调节镜腿的长度，达到调整佩戴件100上声学输出端30与耳部的距离或者改善用户佩戴舒适度的目的。例如，通过选择合适的调节件，可以使得佩戴件100上声学输出端30距离用户耳屏的水平距离在适当的距离(例如，不超过2cm、2.5cm、3cm、3.5cm等)，从而提高用户听到的音量。再例如，在一副眼镜配件中，调节件150可包括长度为L1的镜腿调节件、长度为L2的镜腿调节件、长度为L3的镜腿调节件，其中L1＜L2＜L3。在一些示例性使用场景中，当眼镜中装配长度为L2的调节件150时，若用户佩戴时觉得镜腿过长，可以替换为长度为L1的调节件150。若用户佩戴时觉得镜腿过短，可替换为长度为L3的调节件 150。
本说明书实施例提供的眼镜，通过在镜腿上设置调节件150，以通过调节件150和镜片组件实现拆卸连接，并可通过替换不同规格的调节件以调节镜腿的长度，以适应不同的用户，并提升用户的使用舒适度。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以包括可拆卸连接的镜腿和调节件150。镜腿包括相对设置的连接端103和架设端102。连接端103与调节件150可拆卸连接，即调节件150可拆卸地连接于镜腿的连接端103。架设端102将镜腿架设于耳廓。
在本实施例中，调节件150可替换地连接于镜腿，以通过替换不同规格的调节件150以调节镜腿的长度。如前述，调节件150能够被配置为可替换的不同规格的调节件150，即为一副眼镜配置多个不同规格的调节件150，其中每一个调节件150均可与镜腿实现可拆卸连接，进而可以通过不同规格的调节件150来调节镜腿的长度。
如图27所示，在一些实施例中，镜腿的连接端103设有第一卡扣110，调节件150连接镜腿的端部设有第二卡扣154，第一卡扣110和第二卡扣154配合以实现调节件150和镜腿的可拆卸连接。其中，第一卡扣110可以是凸块，第二卡扣154可以是插槽，凸块插设于插槽中以实现调节件150和镜腿的连接。在另一些实施例中，第一卡扣110可以是插槽，第二卡扣154可以是凸块。在一些替代性实施例中，第一卡扣110可以是卡勾结构，第二卡扣154也可以是凹槽结构，卡勾设于凹槽内以实现调节件150和镜腿的连接。
在一些实施例中，可以通过磁性吸引的方式实现调节件150和镜腿的连接。例如，镜腿的连接端103设有磁性件，调节件150采用磁性材料制成，调节件150和镜腿之间通过磁性吸引的方式实现连接。又例如，连接端103设有磁性件，调节件150连接镜腿的端部设有磁性件，通过异性相吸的原理实现连接。还例如，调节件150内设有永磁体，镜腿的连接端103设有通电线圈，通过对通电线圈通电以产生磁力进而吸引或者排斥永磁体，从而实现调节件150和镜腿的装配或者拆卸。
在一些实施例中，调节件150可以与前述一个或多个实施例中的佩戴件100相结合。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100(例如，镜腿)可以包括连接段10和下凹段20。下凹段20使镜腿上边沿在镜腿有向下的凹陷22。下凹段20内具有声学输出端30。其中，连接段10可以包括第一连接段12和第二连接段14，下凹段20连接在第一连接段12和第二连接段14之间。第一连接段12架设于用户的耳廓，第二连接段14连接调节件150。下凹段20可以包括呈角度连接的安装部21和过渡部23。声学输出端30设置于安装部21或过渡部23。过渡部23连接于安装部21和第一连接段12之间，且过渡部23与第一连接段12弯折连接并向下延伸，以便于在佩戴时延伸向耳屏，以拉近设置于声学输出端30与外耳道之间的距离。第二连接段14与安装部21的一端连接，第二连接段14远离安装部21的一端用于与调节件150连接。
在一些实施例中，调节件150可以包括桩头。桩头可以将眼镜的镜腿与镜框或镜片进行连接，实现镜腿相对于镜框或镜片的转动。在一些实施例中，桩头的一端可以与镜框或镜片固定连接，桩头的另一端与镜腿可转动连接。例如，桩头的另一端与镜框或镜片可以通过粘接、镶嵌、焊接、铆接、螺钉连接、卡扣连接等方式进行连接。桩头的另一端与镜腿可以通过铰链机构进行连接，使得镜腿能够相对桩头进行转动，从而使得用户可以根据需要调整镜腿与镜框或者镜片之间的夹角。除此之外，桩头的一端也可以与镜框或镜片可转动连接，而桩头的另一端可以与镜腿固定连接，诸如此类的变形均在本说明书的保护范围之内。
在一些实施例中，当眼镜为无框眼镜(即眼镜没有镜框，镜腿直接与镜片连接)时，由于桩头与镜片的连接通常是可拆卸的，因此可以通过替换桩头和/或镜片来满足不同用户的需求。
在一些实施例中，可以通过替换不同尺寸的镜片来调节眼镜的宽度。眼镜的宽度可以是指两个镜腿与镜片或镜框连接处之间的距离。例如，眼镜的宽度可以包括两个镜片的宽度以及两个镜片之间的鼻梁间距之和。因此，通过替换不同尺寸的镜片就可以使眼镜具有不同的宽度，从而满足不同用户的需求。例如，当用户头部宽度较大时，镜片宽度不够可能会导致用户佩戴眼镜时受到的来自镜腿的挤压力过大，选用宽度更大的镜片可以提高眼镜的宽度，降低镜腿对用户头部的挤压力。又例如，当用户头部宽度较小时，镜片宽度不够可能会导致用户头部与眼镜贴合不牢固，从而使得眼镜容易脱落，选用宽度更小的镜片可以缩短眼镜的宽度，提高用户头部与眼镜的贴合度。
在一些实施例，可以通过替换不同尺寸的桩头来调节眼镜的整体尺寸(例如，眼镜的长度和宽度)。桩头的尺寸可以是指桩头的长度和宽度。桩头的长度可以是指桩头沿镜腿长度方向上的尺寸。桩头的宽度可以是指桩头沿镜片宽度方向上的尺寸。眼镜的长度可以包括桩头沿镜腿长度方向上的尺寸以及镜腿长度之和。桩头的长度会影响镜腿到镜片的距离，进而影响声学输出端30到用 户耳部的距离。示例性的，用户佩戴眼镜时，镜腿上的声学输出端30到镜片的距离与桩头的长度相关联。例如，桩头长度越长，声学输出端30到镜片的距离就越远。又例如，桩头长度越短，声学输出端30到镜片的距离就越近。在一些情况下，若桩头的长度过短，可能会导致声学输出端30与镜片距离较近，虽然此时声学输出端30位于用户耳部前方，但两者距离较远。若桩头的长度过长，可能会导致声学输出端30与镜片距离较远，以至于声学输出端30位于用户耳部后方甚至后方距离较远的位置，上述情况都可能导致声学输出端30传递声音的效果变差，影响用户体验。桩头的宽度则会影响眼镜的宽度。示例性的，桩头的宽度越大，会增大与桩头连接的两个镜腿之间的间距，从而增大眼镜的宽度。而桩头的宽度越小，相应的两个镜腿之间的间距就更短，眼镜的宽度也就更小。在一些实施例中，可以根据佩戴者(即用户)的头型以及头部尺寸选择适合的镜片或者合适的桩头来调整眼镜的宽度，从而使用户佩戴眼镜时更加舒适。例如，当用户头部宽度较大时，选用宽度更大的镜片和/或宽度更大的桩头可以提高眼镜的宽度，降低镜腿对用户头部的挤压力。在一些实施例中，可以根据用户的头型以及头部尺寸选择适合的桩头来缩短声学输出端30与用户耳部的距离，以使不同用户佩戴眼镜时镜腿上的声学输出端30都能够很好地向用户传递声音。例如，当用户头部前后长度较小时，眼镜长度过长可能会导致用户佩戴眼镜时声学输出端30位于用户耳部后方且距离耳部较远，选用长度更小的桩头可以缩短眼镜的长度，降低镜腿对用户头部的挤压力。
在一些实施例中，眼镜可以为半框眼镜(即镜片边缘至少部分被镜框包围)或者全框眼镜(即镜片边缘完全被镜框包围)。由于桩头与镜框的连接通常为固定连接，因此拆卸桩头和镜框的难度较高。基于上述原因，可以对镜腿结构进行改进，进而可以通过调节镜腿来调节眼镜的尺寸。在一些实施例中，镜腿可以包括第一段和与第一段连接的第二段。第一段的一端可以与桩头连接，第一段的另一端可以与第二端连接。其中，第一段和第二段可以进行相对转动、伸缩、拆卸等操作。在本实施例中，可以将镜腿的第一段以及与第一段连接的桩头、镜片、镜腿等部件视作整体。第一段和第二段的相对转动、伸缩以及拆卸等操作来调节眼镜的尺寸。在一些情况下，当眼镜的宽度不合适或者声学输出端30与耳部的距离较远时，可以通过替换镜腿的第一段以及与第一段连接的桩头和镜框来进行调节，以满足不同用户的需求。在一些实施例中，镜腿的第一段可以相当于前述实施例中的第一腿部141，可以用于与可视件(例如，镜框)进行连接。镜腿的第二段可以相当于前述实施例中的第二腿部143，可以用于安装部21进行连接。镜腿的第一段和镜腿的第二段具体如何实现相对转动、相对伸缩以及拆卸的可以参见图13的描述，此处不再赘述。本实施例中所列举的半框眼镜、全框眼镜仅作为示例，并不仅限于眼镜的类型，示例性的，当眼镜为无框眼镜时，其镜腿同样可以包括第一段和第二段，且依旧可以将第一段与桩头、镜片视作一个整体进行替换。
图28是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的U型构件和连接杆的连接结构示意图。在一些实施例中，镜腿和桩头可以通过如图28所示的U型构件180和连接杆160进行连接。U型构件180可以具有一U型凹口181。U型凹口181的两个侧壁上可以对称设置有三组第一定位通孔183(例如，183-1、183-2、183-3)，三组第一定位通孔183沿U型凹口181的侧壁的长度方向分布。连接杆160的第一端设置有三组第二定位通孔163(例如，163-1、163-2、163-3)，三组第二定位通孔沿连接杆160的长度方向分布。连接杆160的第二端可以与镜腿的其他部件(例如，镜腿的第一段)连接。连接杆160的第一端可以伸入U型构件180的U型凹口181内，并通过定位件170(例如，定位杆)和第一定位通孔183与第二定位通孔163的配合将连接杆160与U型构件180进行固定，从而将镜腿与桩头固定连接。在一些实施例中，连接杆160可以是镜腿的部件。例如，连接杆160可以与镜腿的第一段连接。在一些实施例中，U型构件180可以是桩头的部件，桩头还可以包括图28中未示出的用于与镜片或者镜框连接的部件(例如，铰链机构)。
在本实施例中，眼镜的长度可以是指U型构件180的长度以及镜腿未伸入所述U型凹口181的部分的长度之和。而镜腿的长度可以包括连接杆160与镜腿的其他部件(例如，镜腿的第一段和第二段)的长度之和。因此，随着连接杆160伸入到U型凹口181中的长度不同，眼镜的长度也会发生变化。在图28中，连接杆160与U型构件180的连接可以被分为三个状态，示例性的：(1)当连接杆160伸入U型凹口181的长度最长时，连接杆160上的三个第二定位通孔(163-1、163-2、163-3)分别与第一定位通孔(183-1、183-2、183-3)对齐并通过三个定位件170分别进行固定，此时眼镜的长度最短。(2)当连接杆160伸入U型凹口181的长度最短时，连接杆160上的第二定位通孔163-3与第一定位通孔183-1对齐并通过一定位件170进行固定，此时眼镜的长度最长。(3)当连接杆160伸入U型凹口181使得连接杆160上的第二定位通孔163-1和163-2分别与第一定位通孔183-1和183-2对齐并通过两个定位件170分别进行固定时，眼镜的长度介于最短和最长之间。需要说明的是，U型构件180和连接杆160上还可以设置有其他固定结构，以防止连接 杆160和U型构件180在只有一个定位件170固定时，连接杆160与U型构件180发生相对转动。例如，在连接杆160设置有第二定位通孔163的侧壁上设置磁铁，在U型凹口181的侧壁设置磁铁，当连接杆160伸入U型凹口181时，连接杆160上的磁铁与U型凹口181的磁铁会互相吸引，防止连接杆160与U型构件180相对转动。连接杆160与U型构件180的结构及其连接方式仅作为示例，并不旨在限制其具体结构，本领域技术人员可以对其进行变换，以得到不同结构的连接杆160与U型构件180的实施例，这些实施例均在本说明书的保护范围内。在一些实施例中，连接杆160可以是桩头的零部件，而U型构件180可以是镜腿的零部件。在一些实施例中，第一定位通孔183和第二定位孔163的数量可以不仅限三组，例如，第一定位通孔183和第二定位孔163的数量可以为两组、四组、五组或更多。
在一些实施例中，可以通过调整连接杆160伸入到U型凹口181中的长度来调整眼镜的长度，进而调整声学输出端30与耳部的距离。例如，当声学输出端30位于用户耳部后方且距离耳部较远时，表明眼镜长度过长，此时可以增大连接杆160伸入到U型凹口181中的长度以缩短眼镜的长度。又例如，当声学输出端30位于用户耳部前方且距离耳部较远时，表明眼镜长度过短，此时可以减小连接杆160伸入到U型凹口181中的长度以增大眼镜的长度。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000的形态可以是固定的，即可穿戴设备1000的形状不可调整。例如，佩戴件100与可视件200之间的相对位置不能生改变，最终使得可穿戴设备1000的形态无法发生变化。在图4所示的实施例中，可视件200可以与佩戴件100一体成型，使得可视件200与佩戴件100的连接关系、相对位置固定，因此可穿戴设备1000的形态也固定。
图29是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的相对位置检测装置的设置位置的示意图。在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000的形态是可调整的，也即佩戴件100的形状可以发生改变。例如，当可穿戴设备1000为眼镜时，眼镜可以以图29所示的形态存在，该形态下的眼镜的镜腿与镜框之间形成的夹角近似等于90度。该形态下的眼镜可以直接由用户进行佩戴。此外，眼镜还可以以其他形态存在。例如，眼镜的镜腿沿镜腿与镜框的连接点朝向其内侧(即朝向另外一条镜腿的方向)进行转动，使得镜腿与镜框的之间夹角缩小。在该状态下，眼镜无法直接佩戴，然而由于眼镜的尺寸相对于其他形态而言更小，因此更适宜携带和存放。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以相对可视件200活动，以便于用户对可穿戴设备1000的形态进行调整。用户在使用本说明书提供的可穿戴设备1000时，可以根据使用场景和目的对可穿戴设备1000的形态进行调整，有效提高用户使用体验。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括用于连接佩戴件100和可视件200的连接组件，佩戴件100与可视件200可以通过连接组件可活动连接。在一些实施例中，连接组件可以包括前述示例中的调节件150，例如，连接组件可以是桩头。通过桩头即可使佩戴件100相对于可视件200进行转动。
在一些实施例中，用户可以根据实际需求调整可穿戴设备的形态。例如，当用户不需要使用可穿戴设备1000时，可以将可穿戴设备1000进行收纳。又例如，当用户需要使用可穿戴设备1000时，需要将可穿戴设备1000调整为可使用状态。可穿戴设备1000上的一个或多个功能元件依靠电源提供电力。在一些实施例中，为了提高可穿戴设备1000的续航能力，在非使用状态时，可以将一个或多个功能元件关闭或者调整为休眠状态。例如，在不使用可穿戴设备1000时，可以关闭或者暂停扬声器组件播放音乐。又例如，在不使用可穿戴设备1000时，可以将电源关闭或者调整为休眠状态。
在一些实施例中，用户可以通过手动控制的方式来控制一个或多个功能元件运行。例如，控制电路组件可以包括设置在佩戴件100和/或可视件200上的按钮、触控板等结构。用户触摸、按动按钮、触控板时会产生反馈信号，控制电路组件可以根据反馈信号来对声学元件(例如，扬声器组件)进行控制。在一些实施例中，按钮、触控板会根据用户触摸、按动的方式不同而产生不同的反馈信号。例如，用户按动按钮一次，可以生成对应使扬声器组件暂停播放音乐的反馈信号。又例如，用户轻点按钮两次，可以生成对应使扬声器组件切换下一首音乐的反馈信号。又例如，用户在触摸板上画圆圈，可以生成对应使扬声器组件停止运行的反馈信号。用户的操作对应的反馈信号类型可以根据实际需要进行设定。在一些应用场景中，当用户不使用可穿戴设备100时，可以先将一个或多个功能元件关闭、暂停或者调整为其他耗电量较低的状态，节省功耗，提高待机时间。在另一些应用场景中，当用户需要将可穿戴设备1000进行收纳或者携带时，可以先对一个或多个功能元件进行调整，然后再调整可穿戴设备1000的形态。例如，先关闭扬声器组件，关闭电源，然后调整佩戴件100与可视件200之间的相对位置，使其相对折叠以便于进行携带或存放。
然而，在一些实施例中，基于用户手动控制的方式控制扬声器组件运行可能会出现用户没有使用可穿戴设备1000时忘记暂停、关闭功能元件的情况。例如，用户只是调整佩戴件100与可视件200之间的相对位置，使其相对折叠，却没有关闭扬声器组件以及电源。扬声器组件工作时会持续消耗电量，这会导致电源持续向扬声器组件输送电力，提高了可穿戴设备1000的功耗。
因此，为了克服上述问题，本说明书提供的可穿戴设备1000还包括检测组件。检测组件可以与前述一个或多个实施例中的一个或多个功能元件通信/连接。在一些实施例中，检测组件可以用于检测可穿戴设备1000的形态，处理器可以根据可穿戴设备1000的形态确定可穿戴设备1000的使用状态，控制电路组件可以基于可穿戴设备1000的使用状态对其他一个或多个功能元件进行控制。在一些实施例中，检测组件可以用于检测佩戴件100与可视件200之间的位置关系，基于该位置关系可以确定出可穿戴设备1000的形态。下面将结合图29对检测组件进行详细描述。
图29是本说明书一些实施例所示的相对位置检测装置的设置位置的示意图。如图29所示，在一些实施例中，检测组件可以包括相对位置检测装置(图中未示出)，相对位置检测装置可以用于检测佩戴件100相对于可视件200的位置，其中，相对位置检测装置可以设置在佩戴件100与可视件200的连接处，即图29所示的A处。
在一些实施例中，当佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第一位置时，可以称可穿戴设备1000为折叠状态。当佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第二位置时，可以称可穿戴设备1000为张开状态。当佩戴件100相对可视件200处于过渡位置时，可以称可穿戴设备1000为过渡状态。
其中，折叠状态可以是指佩戴件100与可视件200之间的夹角小于第一角度阈值时可穿戴设备1000的形态。在一些实施例中，第一角度阈值可以在10度～45度范围内。在一些实施例中，第一角度阈值可以在10度～30度范围内。在一些实施例中，第一角度阈值可以在10度～15度范围内。
张开状态可以理解为佩戴件100与可视件200之间的夹角大于第二角度阈值时可穿戴设备1000的形态，在该形态下，用户可以佩戴可穿戴设备1000。在一些实施例中，第二角度阈值可以在75～120度范围内。在一些实施例中，第二角度阈值可以在75～100度范围内。在一些实施例中，第二角度阈值可以在75～90度范围内。
过渡状态可以理解为佩戴件100与可视件200之间的夹角大于第一角度阈值且小于第二角度阈值时可穿戴设备1000的形态。在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000未处于折叠状态且未处于张开状态时均可以称作过渡状态。当可穿戴设备1000处于折叠状态或者是过渡状态时，可以认为用户当前没有使用可穿戴设备1000。
在一些实施例中，用户可以根据其需要调整佩戴件100相对于可视件200的位置，从而改变佩戴件100的形态。例如，当用户需要佩戴可穿戴设备1000时，可以将佩戴件100调整至第二位置，使得佩戴件100处于张开状态。又例如，当用户不需要使用可穿戴设备1000时(如，将可穿戴设备1000存放回储存盒中时)，可以将佩戴件100调整至第一位置，使得佩戴件100处于折叠状态。
在一些实施例中，相对位置检测装置可以包括设置在佩戴件100和可视件200连接处的弹簧式探针和导电金属部件。示例性的，弹簧式探针和导电金属部件可以分别设置在佩戴件100和可视件200的连接处。当佩戴件100相对于可视件200发生运动时，弹簧式探针和导电金属部件的相对位置会发生改变，进而使得弹簧式探针和导电金属部件的导通状态发生改变。在一些实施例中，弹簧式探针可以设置在佩戴件100的靠近佩戴件100与可视件200的连接处的边缘，导电金属部件可以设置在可视件200的靠近可视件200与佩戴件100的连接处的边缘。当弹簧式探针和导电金属部件的相对位置较近时，弹簧式探针和导电金属部件可以进行电气连接，使得弹簧式探针处于导通状态。当弹簧式探针和导电金属部件的相对位置较远时，弹簧式探针和导电金属部件无法进行电气连接，使得弹簧式探针处于未导通状态。在本实施例中，可以通过检测弹簧式探针与导电金属部件的导通状态，可以确定可穿戴设备1000的状态。
在一些实施例中，当检测到弹簧式探针处于未导通状态，即弹簧式探针与导电金属部件断开时，可以确定佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第一位置或过渡位置；当检测到弹簧式探针处于导通状态，即弹簧式探针与导电金属部件电气连接时，可以确定佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第二位置。
在一些实施例中，相对位置检测装置可以包括开关结构，当佩戴件100相对可视件200的位置发生变化时，会影响开关结构的状态，通过检测开关结构的导通状态确定佩戴件100的位置，进而确定可穿戴设备1000的状态。在一些实施例中，当检测到开关结构处于闭合状态，即导通状态 时，可以确定可穿戴设备1000处于张开状态；当检测到开关结构处于开路状态，即未导通状态时，可以确定可穿戴设备1000处于折叠状态或者过渡状态。示例性的，以微动开关为例，微动开关设置在图29中A处。微动开关可以包括传动元件(图中未示出)以及与传动元件连接的动作簧片(图中未示出)，当可穿戴设备1000处于张开状态时，佩戴件100处于第二位置，此时佩戴件100或可视件200会压迫传动元件，传动元件会将力作用于动作簧片，导致动作簧片的触点接通，使得微动开关处于导通状态；当可穿戴设备1000处于过渡状态或者折叠状态时，佩戴件100处于过渡位置或者第一位置，此时作用于动作簧片的力不足以导致动作簧片的触点接通，所以微动开关处于未导通状态。在一些实施例中，开关结构的类型可以包括但不限于微动开关、光电开关、接近开关。
在一些实施例中，相对位置检测装置可以包括磁体、导磁体和磁场检测器。磁体能够与导磁体耦合。磁场检测器可以用于检测磁体与导磁体之间的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，可以根据检测得到的磁场强度的结果确定佩戴件100相对可视件200的位置，进而确定可穿戴设备1000的状态。示例性的，磁体和导磁体可以分别设置在佩戴件100和可视件200，当可视件200与佩戴件100的相对位置发生改变时，磁体与导磁体之间的相对位置也会发生变化，进而使得磁体与导磁体之间的磁场强度发生改变，而磁场检测器可以检测到该磁场强度的变化情况，基于该磁场强度的变化情况就可以确定佩戴件100相对可视件200的位置，进而确定可穿戴设备1000的状态。在一些实施例中，当磁体与导磁体之间的磁场强度超过设定的磁场强度阈值时，可以确定佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第二位置；当磁体与导磁体之间的磁场强度未超过设定的磁场强度阈值时，可以确定佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第一位置或过渡位置。在一些实施例中，导磁体可以包括铁、镍、钴等。
在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000还可以包括时间检测装置，时间检测装置可以用于检测佩戴件100相对可视件200处于第二位置的持续时间。在一些应用场景中，用户的误操作或者意外情况可能会使得佩戴件100相对可视件200的位置发生改变，例如，用户不小心调整了佩戴件100的位置。在这种情况下，控制电路组件同样会判断可穿戴设备1000处于使用状态，进而控制相应的部件开始工作(例如，控制扬声器组件播放音乐)。因此，在一些实施例中，只有当检测到佩戴件100处于第二位置时，且超过一定时间时，才可以确定可穿戴设备1000处于张开状态。本实施例可以与前述一个或多个实施例中的各种类型的相对位置检测装置相结合。在一些实施例中，当检测到弹簧式探针与导电金属部件电气连接的持续时间超过预设的时间阈值时，可以确定可穿戴设备1000处于非使用状态。当检测弹簧式探针与导电金属部件电气连接的持续时间未超过预设的时间阈值时，可以确定可穿戴设备1000处于使用状态。在一些实施例中，预设的时间阈值可以为0.5秒钟～8秒钟。在一些实施例中，预设的时间阈值可以为2秒钟～6秒钟。在一些实施例中，预设的时间阈值可以为3秒钟～5秒钟。
在一些实施例中，当确定可穿戴设备1000的使用状态之后，可以基于可穿戴设备1000的使用状态进行相应操作。例如，当检测到可穿戴设备1000处于非使用状态时，控制电路组件可以关闭电源以节省电源电量，提高可穿戴设备1000的续航能力。又例如，当检测到可穿戴设备1000处于使用状态时，控制电路组件可以控制电源向扬声器组件供电，并且控制扬声器组件播放声音信号。
应当注意的是，上述有关检测组件的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明，而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说，在本说明书的指导下可以对检测组件进行各种修正和改变。然而，这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如，相对位置检测装置和时间检测装置可以合并成一个装置，使其同时具有时间检测功能和位置检测功能。又例如，时间检测装置可以省略。
在一些应用场景中，用户可能会对可穿戴设备1000的局部零部件进行更换、维修等操作。在此过程中涉及对可穿戴设备1000的零部件(例如，佩戴件100、可视件200)的拆卸以及组装。可穿戴设备1000的零部件之间的连接结构将会影响拆卸以及组装的难度。例如，当可穿戴设备1000为眼镜时，镜框与镜腿通常通过难以拆卸的连接结构(例如，桩头)进行连接，无论是拆卸还是组装都是费时费力，用户难以自行更换、维修。特别的，当眼镜为智能眼镜(例如，音频眼镜、VR眼镜、AR眼镜)时，其镜腿、镜框上可能还设置有多种功能元件。若将智能眼镜整体换新则花费较大。而其连接结构又导致局部更换(例如，更换镜腿)难度较大，这一定程度上降低了用户的使用体验。
基于上述原因，本说明书提供一种包括快拆组件的可穿戴设备1000，其可视件200与佩戴件100通过快拆组件进行连接，快拆组件能够简化可视件200与佩戴件100之间的安装、拆卸步骤，减小用户更换、维修可穿戴设备1000的局部零件的难度，提高用户体验。下面将结合图30至图37对快拆组件进行详细描述。
图30是根据本说明书一些实施例提供的可穿戴设备的结构示意图，图31是图30所示可穿戴设备的爆炸结构示意图，图32是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座的轴侧结构示意图，图33是图31所示的快拆组件中第一锁定件、第一弹性件、第一定位盖和按键板的剖视结构示意图。如图30-图33所示，在一些实施例中，可穿戴设备1000可以包括可视件200、快拆组件900和佩戴件100。可视件200和佩戴件100分别连接于快拆组件900的两端。相较于通过连接结构进行连接而言，将可视件200或者佩戴件100从快拆组件900拆卸下来或者将可视件200或者佩戴件100进行组装所需要的步骤更简单方便，难度更小，能够有效提高用户使用体验。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100是镜腿，该可穿戴设备1000包括可视件200、两组快拆组件900和两组佩戴件100，两组快拆组件900设置于可视件200的两端，两组佩戴件100分别与对应的一组快拆组件900连接，以构成如图30所示的眼镜类结构。
在一些实施例中，快拆组件900、可视件200以及佩戴件100可以均为独立组件。快拆组件900、可视件200以及佩戴件100相互之间可以进行组装或者拆卸。例如，可视件200和佩戴件100均能够与快拆组件900快速拆卸。在一些实施例中，快拆组件900可以与可视件200或者佩戴件100其中之一固定连接，而与另外一个可拆卸连接。例如，佩戴件100能够与快拆组件900设置成常规连接结构或一体结构，进而无法快速拆卸。
结合图30至图33所示，在一些实施例中，快拆组件900可以包括安装座921和第一锁定件922。安装座921的一端设有插入腔9213，插入腔9213的开口方向朝向安装座的侧壁9216。安装座921上还开设有通孔9211，通孔9211沿插入腔9213的厚度方向贯穿插入腔9213的侧壁9217。第一锁定件922可以设置于安装座921上且经由通孔9211穿过插入腔9213。第一锁定件922包括同轴设置的第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223。第一解锁部9223沿轴向的投影位于第一锁紧部9221沿轴向的投影范围内，即第一解锁部9223与轴向相垂直的截面积小于第一锁紧部9221与轴向相垂直的截面积。第一锁紧部9221用于限位固定可视件200。第一解锁部9223用于解除对可视件200的限位。
其中，第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223同轴设置，指的是第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223端对端连接且沿同一方向延伸。例如，在图33所示的实施例中，第一锁紧部9221的下端部与第一解锁部9223上端部连接且第一锁紧部9221与第一解锁部9223的中心轴线重合。在一些实施例中，第一锁紧部9221与第一解锁部9223的中心轴线也可以只平行，而不重合。
本实施例中，第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223为轴径不同的轴段，第一锁紧部9221的轴径大于第一解锁部9223的轴径。由于第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223同轴设置，因此第一解锁部9223与轴向相垂直的截面积小于第一锁紧部9221与轴向相垂直的截面积。
在一些实施例中，第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223可以是杆体或柱体，其与轴向相垂直的横截面可以呈矩形、三角形或多边形等规则或不规则的形状。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可以与安装座921固定连接，并通过安装座921与可视件200可拆卸连接。在一些实施例中，可视件200可以设置有对接部。对接部可以从插入腔9213的开口伸入插入腔9213与插入腔9213配接。通过调整当第一锁紧部9221由于第一锁定件922无法脱离对接部，因此可以使得可视件200与安装座921相对固定。
在一些实施例中，第一锁定件922可以设置于安装座921上且穿设插入腔9213中。其中，当第一锁紧部9221位于插入腔9213内时，可对可视件200进行限位固定。当第一解锁部9223位于插入腔9213内时，可解除对可视件200的限位而自安装座921上拆卸下可视件200。
如图31所示，在一些实施例中，可视件200设有锁定孔212和与锁定孔212连通的过道214。锁定孔212的直径大于过道214的宽度。过道214的宽度介于第一锁紧部9221的轴径和第一解锁部9223的轴径之间以使得第一解锁部9223可通过过道214进入锁定孔212，而第一锁紧部9221无法通过过道214。因而当第一锁紧部9221位于锁定孔212内时，可以保持可视件200与插入腔9213相对固定。这里的通过可以是指第一解锁部9223能够嵌入到过道214中并在过道214中移动。
在一些实施例中，锁定孔212可以设置在可视件200的边沿，以使得锁定孔212具有一开口。开口的宽度小于锁定孔212的直径。开口的宽度介于第一锁紧部9221的轴径和第一解锁部9223的轴径之间以使得第一解锁部9223可通过开口进入锁定孔212，而第一锁紧部9221无法通过开口。当第一锁紧部9221位于锁定孔212内时，可以保持可视件200与插入腔9213相对固定。
在可视件200与快拆组件900的装配过程中，将第一锁定件922经由通孔9211插入并调整第一锁定件922以使得第一解锁部9223位于插入腔9213内，再将可视件200的对接部(即设置 有锁定孔212和过道214的部分)伸入插入腔9213中。插入腔9213可防止可视件200相对安装座921摆动以便于将过道214与第一解锁部9223相对准。待过道214与第一解锁部9223对齐后调整第一锁定件922使得第一解锁部9223经过道214进入锁定孔212。然后再次相对安装座921调整第一锁定件922(例如，沿第一锁定件922的轴线方向推动第一锁定件922移动)，以使得第一锁紧部9221位于插入腔9213内。由于第一锁紧部9221无法通过过道214，因此第一锁紧部9221可以与锁定孔212相装配而对可视件200进行限位固定，继而将可视件200固定于安装座921。
在可视件200与快拆组件900的拆卸过程中，可以调整第一锁定件922以使得第一解锁部9223取代第一锁紧部9221的位置而位于锁定孔212内，并相对插入腔9213抽动可视件200，使得第一解锁部9223相对经过过道214而脱离锁定孔212，从而自安装座921上拆卸下可视件200。
通过在安装座921的一端设置插入腔9213，将第一锁定件922设置于安装座921上且穿过插入腔9213。同时，又将第一锁定件922配置为相对其轴线方向位置可调，进而可通过调整第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223中的一者位于插入腔9213，从而使得第一锁紧部9221或第一解锁部9223与可视件200上的锁定孔212相装配。然后通过过道214限制第一锁紧部9221以便于锁定插设于插入腔9213的可视件200或通过第一解锁部9223解除对可视件200的锁定状态，进而可提高可视件200和安装座921之间的拆卸效率。
在一些实施例中，可通过包括按压、旋转、推拉在内的方式调整第一锁定件922的位置，以使得第一解锁部9223和第一锁紧部9221可轮流位于插入腔9213，以便于可视件200与安装座921之间的拆装。
如图33所示，在一些实施例中，快拆组件900还可以包括第一弹性件923。第一弹性件923可以设置于安装座921上且与第一锁紧部9221弹性抵接，第一弹性件923可以用于提供第一弹力以使得第一锁紧部9221在无外力作用时位于插入腔9213中。在一些应用场景中，当用户想要将可视件200从安装座921上拆卸下来或是安装可视件200时，首先需要调整第一锁定件922使得第一解锁部9223位于插入腔9213，在这个过程中第一锁定件922会压缩第一弹性件923，使得第一弹性件923产生第一弹力。当用户拆卸完毕或者将锁定孔212与通孔9211对齐后，可以停止施加外力。第一弹性件923提供的第一弹力可以推动第一锁紧部9221运动至插入腔9213中或者使得第一锁紧部9221运动至锁定孔212中对可视件200进行固定。
在一些实施例中，第一弹性件923可以包括压簧、弹性柱或弹垫等。其受外力挤压可变形，并在外力撤除后恢复原状。通过设置第一弹性件923以便于在无外力干扰下维持第一锁紧部9221位于插入腔9213中，以及可在外力消除后回弹使得第一锁紧部9221位于插入腔9213，提高了固定可视件200的可靠性，且提高了用户的操作便捷性，对用户更友好。
如图33所示，在一些实施例中，第一弹性件923可以设置于安装座921内且弹性抵接于第一锁紧部9221背离第一解锁部9223的一端。其中，若用户需要解除第一锁定件922对可视件200的固定，可以按压第一锁定件922，此时第一锁定件922会向上方移动并压缩第一弹性件923。当第一解锁部9223取代第一锁紧部9221而位于插入腔9213时，第一锁定件922对于可视件200的固定解除。当用户解除按压第一锁定件922时，第一弹性件923会推动第一锁定件922复位(即向下方移动)，直至第一锁紧部9221重新移动到插入腔9213中。
在一些实施例中，可以将前述实施例中的通孔9211替换为盲孔。例如，在图32所示的实施例中，盲孔的开口端可以位于插入腔9213的其中一个侧壁9217，盲孔的底端可以位于插入腔9213的另外一个侧壁9217。第一弹性件923可以设置于安装座921的盲孔内且弹性抵接于第一锁紧部9221背离第一解锁部9223的一端。当用户按压第一锁定件922时，第一锁定件922会朝盲孔的底部运动并压缩第一弹性件923直至第一解锁部9223取代第一锁紧部9221位于插入腔9213中。当用户解除按压第一锁定件922时，第一弹性件923的弹力会推动第一锁定件922朝向背离盲孔底部的方向运动，直至第一锁紧部9221再次运动至插入腔9213中。
如图33所示，在一些实施例中，第一锁紧部9221还与盲孔的侧壁限位连接。第一锁定件922可沿盲孔内壁往返滑动，继而可调整第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223轮流位于插入腔9213以与锁定孔212相装配。例如，第一锁定件922可以与设置于该盲孔的侧壁的限位环限位配合。需要说明的是，本说明书一个或多个实施例仅出于说明目的，并不旨在限制第一锁定件922与安装座921之间的配接方式。在一些实施例中，将前述实施例中的盲孔替换为通孔9211之后，也可以使得通孔9211与第一锁定件922限位连接。例如，在通孔9211的侧壁上设置至少两个限位结构(例如，限位环)，两个限位结构沿通孔的轴线方向分布在侧壁的不同位置，第一锁定件922可以设置在两个限位结构之间并在两个限位结构之间往返滑动。
如图33所示，在一些实施例中，快拆组件900还可以包括第一定位盖924，第一定位盖924设置于安装座921上，第一弹性件923可以弹性压缩设置于第一定位盖924和第一锁紧部9221之间。
在一些实施例中，安装座921上设有通孔9211，第一定位盖924可以设置于该通孔9211中，例如通过包括过盈装配、螺接或粘接等在内的方式与该通孔9211连接。其中第一锁定件922可以与第一定位盖924滑动限位连接。在一些实施例中，通孔也可以替换为盲孔，第一定位盖924也可以设置在该盲孔中。
结合图32和图33所示，在一些实施例中，第一定位盖924可以包括筒体9241、设置于筒体9241一端的底壁9243和设置于筒体9241另一端的挡环9245。第一锁紧部9221背离第一解锁部9223的一端设有倒扣9225。第一弹性件923设置于底壁9243和第一锁紧部9221之间。第一锁紧部9221与筒体9241可滑动设置，通过倒扣9225与挡环9245配合以限制第一锁定件922脱离第一定位盖924。
在一些实施例中，第一锁紧部9221的端部可以有呈环圈式的整个倒扣9225。在一些实施例中，倒扣9225的数量可以有多个，可以是三个、四个或五个等，多个倒扣9225沿第一锁紧部9221的端部围绕设置。其中，倒扣9225可以设有导向面，以便于倒扣9225经挡环9245插入筒体9241内并与挡环9245形成止挡配合。
在一些实施例中，第一定位盖924可以是平盖。挡环9245可设置于安装座921上的通孔9211的侧壁上。第一锁定件922从通孔9211的一端穿过挡环9245，第一锁定件922的倒扣9225可与挡环9245止挡配合，第一定位盖924再封盖该通孔9211，第一弹性件923位于该通孔9211内，且第一弹性件923弹性压缩于该平盖和第一锁紧部9221之间。
在一些实施例中，一个第一锁定件922、一个第一弹性件923和一个第一定位盖924可以组合成一个集合体，当集合体的数量为一个时，构成集合体的第一锁定件922自身的一端可作为按键，无需单独设置按键板925。
如图33所示，在一些实施例中，快拆组件900可以包括两个由第一锁定件922、第一弹性件923和第一定位盖924组成的集合体。快拆组件900还可以包括按键板925。两个集合体可以通过按键板925进行连接。示例性的，各集合体的第一解锁部9223远离第一锁紧部9221的一端均连接于按键板925上，通过按压按键板925可同时接触各集合体的第一锁定件922对可视件200的锁定，提高了解锁效率。
在一些实施例中，集合体的数量可以不仅限于一个或者两个，还可以为三个、四个或更多。
在一些实施例中，可通过旋转的方式调整第一锁定件922的位置。例如，第一锁定件922上设有螺纹，安装座921上设有螺纹孔，第一锁定件922与螺纹孔螺纹连接，通过调整第一锁定件922与螺纹孔的旋合深度，以调整第一锁紧部9221或第一解锁部9223位于插入腔9213内。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可相对安装座921转动或不可转动。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100可通过焊接或粘接等方式固定连接，或者佩戴件100与安装座921呈一体结构，例如一体注塑成型或一体铸造等方式，从而可认为安装座921是佩戴件100的一部分。
在一些实施例中，佩戴件100与安装座921可拆卸连接，可便于更换不同长度的佩戴件100或安装座921，以更适应于用户的使用需求。
图34是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座与佩戴件连接的第一实施例的结构示意图。如图34所示，在一些实施例中，安装座921的另一端设有插入槽9212。佩戴件100的一端设有插入部932。插入部932与插入槽9212可拆卸连接。在一些实施例中，佩戴件100能够相对安装座921转动，从而使得佩戴件100可向可视件200转动(例如，在图30所示的实施例中，每个佩戴件100可以朝向另一个佩戴件100的方向相对可视件200转动)，以折叠于可视件200的一侧，以便于可穿戴设备1000的收藏、存放。
如图34所示，在本说明书提供的第一实施例中，快拆组件900还可以包括第二锁定件926、第二弹性件927和第二定位盖928。第二锁定件926的结构可以与第一锁定件922的结构相同或相似，第二弹性件927可以与第一弹性件923相同或相似，第二定位盖928可以与第一定位盖924的结构相同或相似。
在一些实施例中，第二锁定件926可以包括同轴设置的第二锁紧部9261和第二解锁部9263。第二定位盖928设置于安装座921上。第二锁定件926与第二定位盖928可滑动设置，且第二锁定件926穿过插入槽9212，第二弹性件927弹性压缩设置于第二定位盖928和第二锁定件926之间；插入部932设有转动孔9320和与转动孔9320连通的通道9322，插入部932设置于插入槽9212， 第二锁紧部9261位于转动孔9320，且第二锁紧部9261与转动孔9320转动配合。其中，当用户需要拆下佩戴件100时，可以按压第二锁定件926的一端，使得第二解锁部9263沿其轴线方向运动以取代第二锁紧部9261的位置而位于转动孔9320中，并通过通道9322分离脱离转动孔9320。此外，在第二锁定件926运动的过程中会压缩第二弹性件927产生第二弹力。反之，当用户需要安装佩戴件100时，首先可以按压第二锁定件926的一端，使得第二解锁部9263沿其轴线方向运动以取代第二锁紧部9261的位置而位于转动孔9320中。然后控制第二解锁部9263通过通道9322进入转动孔9320中。最后停止按压第二锁定件926，第二弹性件927产生的第二弹力可以使得第二锁定部回到转动孔9320中，对转动孔9320进行固定。通过第二锁定件926、第二弹性件927以及第二定位盖928之间的相互配合可以使得佩戴件100能够较快捷方便地与安装座921进行拆装。
图35是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座与佩戴件连接的第二实施例的结构示意图，图36是图35所示安装座与佩戴件连接结构的另一视角的结构示意图。如图35和图36所示，在本说明书提供的第二实施例中，插入部932包括间隔设置的两个延伸子部9324。两个延伸子部9324相背离的一侧均设有卡扣凸块9325。插入槽9212的侧壁还设有与两个卡扣凸块9325相配合的两个卡扣槽9214。当插入部932伸入插入槽9212时，卡扣凸块9325可以卡设于对应的卡扣槽9214内，进而将佩戴件100与安装座921固定连接。
在一些实施例中，两个延伸子部9324可以间隔设置，其中间具有间隔空腔，因而在两个卡扣凸块9325与两个卡扣槽9214相装配时，两个卡扣凸块9325与插入槽9212的侧壁挤压使得两个延伸子部9324彼此靠近，以便于卡扣凸块9325进入插入槽9212内与对应的卡扣槽9214相卡接。并且在卡扣凸块9325卡设于对应的卡扣槽9214内后，两个延伸子部9324能够恢复原状，以使得卡扣凸块9325与卡扣槽9214之间的连接更牢靠。此外，当用户转动佩戴件100时，可驱动卡扣凸块9325在卡扣槽9214内转动，从而可以调节佩戴件100相对安装座921的角度。
在一些实施例中，插入槽9212的侧壁可以还设有通向卡扣槽9214的导向槽9215，导向槽9215可以导引卡扣凸块9325快速、准确地进入卡扣槽9214，提高拆装效率。在一些实施例中，两个导向槽9215的槽底之间的间距可以小于两个卡扣凸块9325相背离的端部之间的间距，以减小导向槽9215对两个延伸子部9324挤压变形程度，使得卡扣凸块9325更易于装设于卡扣槽9214。两个卡扣槽9214的槽底之间的间距可以大于两个卡扣凸块9325相背离的端部之间的间距，以解除卡扣槽9214对卡扣凸块9325的挤压，便于两个延伸子部9324恢复原状，从而提高插入部932和插入槽9212的连接牢固程度。
如图35和图36所示，在一些实施例中，卡扣凸块9325可以呈半球状，以便于佩戴件100与安装座921之间的转动。在一些实施例中，卡扣凸块9325还可以呈圆柱状、棱柱状等，本说明书对此不做限定。
图37是图31所示可穿戴设备中安装座与佩戴件连接的第三实施例的结构示意图。如图37所示，在本说明书提供的第三实施例中，插入部932可以设有转动孔9320。快拆组件900还包括紧固件929。安装座921上设有与紧固件929装配的安装孔9290。紧固件929可以固定于安装孔9290且穿设过转动孔9320，与转动孔9320转动配合。在一些实施例中，紧固件929可以是螺钉、螺柱或销钉等，本说明书对此不做具体限定。
区别于现有技术的情况，本说明书公开了一种可穿戴设备1000。通过在安装座921的一端设置插入腔9213，第一锁定件922设置于安装座921上且穿过插入腔9213，且第一锁定件922的位置可调，进而可通过调整第一锁紧部9221和第一解锁部9223中的一者位于插入腔9213，从而调整第一锁紧部9221或第一解锁部9223与可视件200上的锁定孔212相装配，以便于锁定插设于插入腔9213的可视件200或解除对可视件200的锁定状态，从而可提高可视件200和安装座921之间的拆卸效率。
应当注意的是，上述有关快拆组件900的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明，而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说，在本说明书的指导下可以对安装座921进行各种修正和改变。然而，这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如，安装座921和佩戴件100可以合并成一个组件，使其同时具有佩戴件100的功能和能够与可视件200进行快速拆卸、组装的功能。又例如，安装座921可以与可视件200固定连接，佩戴件100可以通过第一锁定件922、第一定位盖924、第一弹性件923等部件与安装座921进行快速拆卸和组装。诸如此类的变形均在本说明书的保护范围内。
上文已对基本概念做了描述，显然，对于本领域技术人员来说，上述详细披露仅仅作为示例，而并不构成对本说明书的限定。虽然此处并没有明确说明，本领域技术人员可能会对本说明书 进行各种修改、改进和修正。该类修改、改进和修正在本说明书中被建议，所以该类修改、改进、修正仍属于本说明书示范实施例的精神和范围。
同时，本说明书使用了特定词语来描述本说明书的实施例。如“一个实施例”、“一实施例”和/或“一些实施例”意指与本说明书至少一个实施例相关的某一特征、结构或特点。因此，应强调并注意的是，本说明书中在不同位置两次或多次提及的“一实施例”或“一个实施例”或“一替代性实施例”并不一定是指同一实施例。此外，本说明书的一个或多个实施例中的某些特征、结构或特点可以进行适当的组合。
同理，应当注意的是，为了简化本说明书披露的表述，从而帮助对一个或多个发明实施例的理解，前文对本说明书实施例的描述中，有时会将多种特征归并至一个实施例、附图或对其的描述中。但是，这种披露方法并不意味着本说明书对象所需要的特征比权利要求中提及的特征多。实际上，实施例的特征要少于上述披露的单个实施例的全部特征。
一些实施例中使用了描述成分、属性数量的数字，应当理解的是，此类用于实施例描述的数字，在一些示例中使用了修饰词“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”等来修饰。除非另外说明，“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”表明所述数字允许有±20％的变化。相应地，在一些实施例中，说明书和权利要求中使用的数值数据均为近似值，该近似值根据个别实施例所需特点可以发生改变。在一些实施例中，数值数据应考虑规定的有效数位并采用一般位数保留的方法。尽管本说明书一些实施例中用于确认其范围广度的数值域和数据为近似值，在具体实施例中，此类数值的设定在可行范围内尽可能精确。
最后，应当理解的是，本说明书中所述实施例仅用以说明本说明书实施例的原则。其他的变形也可能属于本说明书的范围。因此，作为示例而非限制，本说明书实施例的替代配置可视为与本说明书的教导一致。相应地，本说明书的实施例不仅限于本说明书明确介绍和描述的实施例。

Claims (35)

  1. 一种可穿戴设备，包括：佩戴件，所述佩戴件包括：
    连接段和下凹段，所述下凹段与所述连接段连接；
    其中，所述下凹段使所述佩戴件上边沿在所述佩戴件有向下的凹陷；所述下凹段内具有声学输出端。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述下凹段被配置为当用户佩戴所述佩戴件时，使所述下凹段靠近所述用户耳部，所述下凹段使所述声学输出端位于用户耳部前方或附近。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述下凹段包括呈角度连接的安装部和过渡部，所述声学输出端设置于所述安装部或所述过渡部，所述过渡部和所述安装部中的至少一个与所述连接段弯折连接并向下延伸。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述可穿戴设备，所述过渡部和所述安装部之间形成的夹角的角度在30度～90度范围内。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的可穿戴设备，所述连接段包括第一连接段，所述过渡部连接于所述安装部和所述第一连接段之间，且所述过渡部与所述第一连接段弯折连接并向下延伸。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述连接段还包括第二连接段，所述第二连接段与所述安装部的一端连接，所述第二连接段远离所述安装部的一端与所述可视件连接。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的可穿戴设备，所述第二连接段包括第一腿部、第二腿部和调节部，所述第一腿部和所述第二腿部通过所述调节部连接，且所述第一腿部和所述第二腿部通过所述调节部可进行包括相对拉伸和/或旋转的操作，所述第二腿部连接所述安装部。
  8. 根据权利要求6所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括功能元件，所述功能元件设置于所述第一连接段、所述下凹段和/或所述第二连接段上。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的可穿戴设备，所述功能元件包括声学元件，所述声学元件通过所述声学输出端发声。
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述声学输出端包括出音孔，所述出音孔设置于以下至少一处：
    所述下凹段朝向用户头部的内侧、所述下凹段朝向所述用户耳屏的棱边或所述下凹段朝向所述用户耳屏的侧面。
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述声学输出端包括振动面，所述下凹段贴向用户头部的内侧设有所述振动面。
  12. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述佩戴件包括左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部，所述左 耳佩戴部和所述右耳佩戴部分别与用户的左、右耳稳定接触；
    所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部均设置有通信组件，所述通信组件用于传递所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部之间的信号。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的可穿戴设备，所述通信组件为无线通信组件。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的可穿戴设备，所述无线通信组件的通信方式包括蓝牙、红外、超宽带、或近场磁感应中的至少一种。
  15. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述可视件与所述佩戴件通过物理方式连接，并且所述佩戴件能够沿与所述可视件的连接点相对所述可视件转动。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括相对位置检测装置，所述相对位置检测装置用于检测所述佩戴件相对于所述可视件的位置；
    其中，当所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于第一位置时，所述可穿戴设备为折叠状态；当所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于第二位置时，所述可穿戴设备为张开状态；当所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于过渡位置时，所述可穿戴设备为过渡状态。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的可穿戴设备，所述相对位置检测装置包括设置在所述佩戴件和所述可视件连接处的弹簧式探针和导电金属部件；
    当所述弹簧式探针与所述导电金属部件断开时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第一位置或所述过渡位置；
    当所述弹簧式探针与所述导电金属部件电气连接时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置。
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的可穿戴设备，所述相对位置检测装置包括开关结构；
    当所述开关结构处于开路状态时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第一位置或所述过渡位置；
    当所述开关结构处于导通状态时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置。
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的可穿戴设备，所述相对位置检测装置包括磁体、导磁体和磁场检测器，所述磁体能够与所述导磁体耦合，所述磁场检测器用于检测所述磁体与所述导磁体之间的磁场强度；
    当所述磁体与所述导磁体之间的磁场强度超过设定的磁场强度阈值时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置；
    当所述磁体与所述导磁体之间的磁场强度未超过设定的磁场强度阈值时，所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第一位置或所述过渡位置。
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的可穿戴设备，所述相对位置检测装置还包括时间检测组件，所述时间检测组件用于检测所述佩戴件相对所述可视件处于所述第二位置的持续时间。
  21. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备进一步包括可视件和快拆组件，所述快拆组件包括安装座和第一锁定件，所述安装座的一端设有插入腔，所述安装座与所述佩戴件或所述可视件其中之一连接，所述第一锁定件设置于所述安装座上且穿过所述插入腔，所述第一锁定件 包括同轴设置的第一锁紧部和第一解锁部，所述第一解锁部沿轴向的投影位于所述第一锁紧部沿轴向的投影范围内；
    所述佩戴件或所述可视件中的另一个设有锁定孔，且插设于所述插入腔；
    当所述第一锁紧部位于所述锁定孔时，所述佩戴件或所述可视件中的另一个与所述插入腔相对固定；
    当所述第一解锁部取代所述第一锁紧部的位置而位于所述锁定孔时，所述第一解锁部能够脱离所述锁定孔。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的可穿戴设备，所述快拆组件还包括第一弹性件，所述第一弹性件设置于所述安装座上且弹性抵接于所述第一锁紧部，所述第一弹性件用于提供弹力使得所述第一锁紧部移动到所述插入腔中。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的可穿戴设备，所述第一弹性件设置于所述安装座内且弹性抵接于所述第一锁紧部背离所述第一解锁部的一端；
    当按压所述第一锁定件时，所述第一锁定件压缩所述第一弹性件，使得所述第一解锁部取代所述第一锁紧部而位于所述插入腔中；当解除按压所述第一锁定件时，所述第一弹性件推动所述第一锁定件复位使得所述第一锁紧部移动到所述插入腔中。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的可穿戴设备，所述快拆组件还包括第一定位盖，所述第一定位盖设置于所述安装座上，所述第一弹性件弹性压缩设置于所述第一定位盖和所述第一锁紧部之间。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的可穿戴设备，所述第一定位盖包括筒体、设置于所述筒体一端的底壁和设置于所述筒体另一端的挡环，所述第一锁紧部背离所述第一解锁部的一端设有倒扣，所述第一弹性件设置于所述筒体一端的底壁和所述第一锁紧部之间，所述第一锁紧部与所述筒体滑动设置，所述倒扣与所述挡环相配合以限制所述第一锁定件脱离所述第一定位盖。
  26. 根据权利要求21所述的可穿戴设备，所述安装座的另一端设有插入槽，所述佩戴件或所述可视件其中之一的一端设有插入部，所述插入部与所述插入槽可拆卸连接。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的可穿戴设备，所述快拆组件还包括第二锁定件、第二弹性件和第二定位盖，所述第二锁定件包括同轴设置的第二锁紧部和第二解锁部，所述第二定位盖设置于所述安装座上，所述第二锁定件与所述第二定位盖滑动设置，且所述第二锁定件穿过所述插入槽，所述第二弹性件弹性压缩设置于所述第二定位盖和所述第二锁定件之间；
    所述插入部设有转动孔和与所述转动孔连通的通道，所述插入部插入所述插入槽，所述第二锁紧部位于所述转动孔中，且所述第二锁紧部与所述转动孔转动配合；
    按压所述第二锁定件的一端，使得所述第二解锁部取代所述第二锁紧部的位置而位于所述转动孔中，并通过所述通道分离所述第二锁紧部和所述转动孔。
  28. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括隔离件，所述隔离件与所述下凹段和/或所述连接段连接，当用户佩戴所述可穿戴设备时，所述隔离件至少包裹用户的耳部的一部分。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括设置于所述下凹段和/或所述连接段上的连接件，所述隔离件通过所述连接件与所述下凹段和/或所述连接段连接。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的可穿戴设备，所述连接件与所述佩戴件可拆卸连接。
  31. 根据权利要求28所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述可视件与所述佩戴件通过物理方式连接，所述佩戴件包括左耳佩戴部以及右耳佩戴部，所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部分别与用户的左、右耳稳定接触；所述左耳佩戴部以及所述右耳佩戴部远离所述可视件的一端通过所述隔离件连接。
  32. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括调节件；
    所述佩戴件包括相对设置的连接端和架设端，所述架设端与用户的耳部稳定接触，所述调节件可替换地连接于所述连接端，以通过替换不同长度的所述调节件来调节所述佩戴件的长度。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的可穿戴设备，所述佩戴件的所述连接端设置有第一卡扣，所述调节件连接所述佩戴件的端部设置有与所述第一卡扣适配的第二卡扣，所述调节件与所述佩戴件通过所述第一卡扣与所述第二卡扣配接实现连接。
  34. 根据权利要求32所述的可穿戴设备，所述可穿戴设备还包括可视件，所述可视件包括定位端，所述调节件的一端可拆卸地连接于所述佩戴件的所述连接端，另一端连接于所述可视件的所述定位端。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的可穿戴设备，所述可视件的所述定位端设置有卡扣部，所述调节件连接所述可视件的端部设置有与所述卡扣部适配的卡合部；
    所述调节件与所述可视件通过所述卡合部与所述卡扣部的配接实现连接。
PCT/CN2021/116273 2020-11-26 2021-09-02 一种可穿戴设备 WO2022110957A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21896461.7A EP4177668A4 (en) 2020-11-26 2021-09-02 PORTABLE DEVICE
JP2023517366A JP2023542151A (ja) 2020-11-26 2021-09-02 ウェアラブル装置
KR1020237008183A KR20230048398A (ko) 2020-11-26 2021-09-02 착용가능장치
US18/155,778 US20230188880A1 (en) 2020-11-26 2023-01-18 Wearable devices

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202022811724 2020-11-26
CN202011350077.3 2020-11-26
CN202011350077 2020-11-26
CN202022811724.8 2020-11-26
CN202120288727.XU CN214704204U (zh) 2021-02-01 2021-02-01 眼镜及其镜腿
CN202120288727.X 2021-02-01
CN202120623637.1 2021-03-26
CN202120623637.1U CN215932289U (zh) 2021-03-26 2021-03-26 眼镜
CN202121079519.5 2021-05-19
CN202110545559.2 2021-05-19
CN202110545559.2A CN115373153A (zh) 2021-05-19 2021-05-19 一种可穿戴设备
CN202121079519.5U CN215642098U (zh) 2021-05-19 2021-05-19 一种可穿戴设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/155,778 Continuation US20230188880A1 (en) 2020-11-26 2023-01-18 Wearable devices

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022110957A1 true WO2022110957A1 (zh) 2022-06-02

Family

ID=81755282

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/116273 WO2022110957A1 (zh) 2020-11-26 2021-09-02 一种可穿戴设备

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20230188880A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4177668A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2023542151A (zh)
KR (1) KR20230048398A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022110957A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
USD1022017S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022018S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022011S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. V-shaped part of glasses with headphones
USD1022023S1 (en) 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Endpieces of glasses with headphones
USD1022019S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022016S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022020S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006079254A1 (en) * 2005-01-31 2006-08-03 Jow Tong Technology Co., Ltd. Eyeglasses with signal receiving function
CN203720476U (zh) * 2013-11-08 2014-07-16 深圳市广百思科技有限公司 一种蓝牙太阳镜
WO2015109002A2 (en) * 2014-01-17 2015-07-23 Okappi, Inc. Hearing assistance system
CN106226920A (zh) * 2016-08-19 2016-12-14 赵矗 多功能智能眼镜
CN106291986A (zh) * 2016-10-27 2017-01-04 吴元旦 一种多功能智能眼镜
CN108509048A (zh) * 2018-04-18 2018-09-07 黄忠胜 一种智能设备的操控装置及其操控方法
JP2018189779A (ja) * 2017-05-01 2018-11-29 アルプス電気株式会社 アイウェア
CN208780924U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN210427991U (zh) * 2019-07-24 2020-04-28 喜临门家具股份有限公司 一种带发音件的眼镜
CN211014859U (zh) * 2018-09-13 2020-07-14 苹果公司 头戴式显示系统和用于头戴式显示系统的音频部件
CN111562676A (zh) * 2020-06-24 2020-08-21 歌尔科技有限公司 一种眼镜

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5260997A (en) * 1991-10-31 1993-11-09 Acs Communications, Inc. Articulated headset
US6176576B1 (en) * 1997-06-06 2001-01-23 Radians, Inc. Eyewear supported by a wearer's concha of an ear
US6729726B2 (en) * 2001-10-06 2004-05-04 Stryker Corporation Eyewear for hands-free communication
DE102016103477A1 (de) * 2016-02-26 2017-08-31 USound GmbH Audiosystem mit strahlformenden Lautsprechern sowie Brille mit einem derartigen Audiosystem
WO2020220723A1 (zh) * 2019-04-30 2020-11-05 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种声学输出装置

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006079254A1 (en) * 2005-01-31 2006-08-03 Jow Tong Technology Co., Ltd. Eyeglasses with signal receiving function
CN203720476U (zh) * 2013-11-08 2014-07-16 深圳市广百思科技有限公司 一种蓝牙太阳镜
WO2015109002A2 (en) * 2014-01-17 2015-07-23 Okappi, Inc. Hearing assistance system
CN106226920A (zh) * 2016-08-19 2016-12-14 赵矗 多功能智能眼镜
CN106291986A (zh) * 2016-10-27 2017-01-04 吴元旦 一种多功能智能眼镜
JP2018189779A (ja) * 2017-05-01 2018-11-29 アルプス電気株式会社 アイウェア
CN108509048A (zh) * 2018-04-18 2018-09-07 黄忠胜 一种智能设备的操控装置及其操控方法
CN208780924U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN211014859U (zh) * 2018-09-13 2020-07-14 苹果公司 头戴式显示系统和用于头戴式显示系统的音频部件
CN210427991U (zh) * 2019-07-24 2020-04-28 喜临门家具股份有限公司 一种带发音件的眼镜
CN111562676A (zh) * 2020-06-24 2020-08-21 歌尔科技有限公司 一种眼镜

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4177668A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2023542151A (ja) 2023-10-05
US20230188880A1 (en) 2023-06-15
KR20230048398A (ko) 2023-04-11
EP4177668A4 (en) 2024-03-27
EP4177668A1 (en) 2023-05-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022110957A1 (zh) 一种可穿戴设备
US10506321B2 (en) Headphones with adaptable fit
WO2020038484A1 (zh) 一种眼镜
WO2019153650A1 (zh) 显示设备
WO2022183752A1 (zh) Ar眼镜
JP2012510218A (ja) 蝶形骨伝導の通信装置及び／或いは補聴装置
CN214704204U (zh) 眼镜及其镜腿
CN209911685U (zh) 一种眼镜
CN208654462U (zh) 可拆换连体镜腿骨传导眼镜
CN215932289U (zh) 眼镜
WO2023185665A1 (zh) 一种智能眼镜套件以及智能眼镜
WO2022183528A1 (zh) 一种便携式音频模块和音频眼镜
KR20140105319A (ko) 헤드마운트 디스플레이장치
CN217181349U (zh) 一种便于拆卸的智能眼镜套件以及智能眼镜
CN210534471U (zh) 开放式骨传导眼镜
CN216145034U (zh) 可穿戴设备及其佩戴件
CN214122601U (zh) 一种带耳机的骨传导tws眼镜
RU2809946C1 (ru) Носимые устройства
CN205374917U (zh) 一种带有外放功能的蓝牙眼镜
TWM614114U (zh) 耳機結構
CN212463475U (zh) 一种基于vr的耳机扬声器
CN219592613U (zh) 一种多用途可拆卸式投影蓝牙耳机
WO2023142745A1 (zh) 佩戴件、可穿戴设备及充电系统
CN220823245U (zh) 一种耳机
CN215986789U (zh) 一种眼镜腿及包括其的智能眼镜

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21896461

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021896461

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230202

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112023002543

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20237008183

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2023517366

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112023002543

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20230210

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE